LEON OWNER’S MANUAL
Inglés 1P0012003DG (07.10) (GT9)
LEON Inglés (07.10)
1P0012003DG
Portada LEON.qxd:Maquetación 1 23/7/10 08:50 Página 3
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
;
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.10
Portada LEON_interior.qxd:maquetación 23/7/10 08:50 Página 3
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with
your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will help preserve its value.
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modifications and part replacements.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the
vehicle.
Leon_EN.book Seite 1 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Leon_EN.book Seite 2 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Contents 3
Contents
Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and storage compartments . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving with LPG* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic parking aid system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Practical Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS
(ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)* . . . . . . . .
Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
6
7
7
7
10
16
16
19
19
21
24
28
30
30
34
37
41
44
46
46
48
51
55
55
55
57
60
61
68
77
91
91
92
96
99
99
105
106
108
110
112
114
117
117
125
127
127
131
135
135
136
138
140
141
143
145
146
148
148
150
154
158
160
160
161
162
163
166
167
170
171
176
178
181
185
185
185
186
187
193
193
194
Leon_EN.book Seite 3 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Contents4
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, parts replacement and
modifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit (Tyre Mobility System)* . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Description of specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 PS) . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.2 77 kW (105 PS) . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 177 kW (240 PS) Cupra . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 195 kW (265 PS) Cupra R . . .
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS)
with/without DPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF
Start&Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF
Ecomotive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS) DPF
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI PD 103 kW (140 PS) without
DPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS) DPF
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
198
199
199
200
200
201
203
203
204
209
212
212
212
213
213
214
214
216
219
220
221
224
228
230
233
234
237
237
245
245
247
252
254
259
267
270
273
273
273
275
275
276
277
277
278
279
280
282
283
284
286
287
288
289
291
292
293
294
296
297
Leon_EN.book Seite 4 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Manual structure 5
Manual structure
What you should know before reading this manual
This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the
vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will
not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the LEON, some of the equipment and
functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or
variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modified in accord-
ance with technical or market requirements or model year; this can not be
interpreted as dishonest advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk** is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol
does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
b The section is continued on the following page.
Marks the end of a section.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn
you about possible dangers of accident or injury.
Caution
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to
your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information on the protec-
tion of the environment.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
Leon_EN.book Seite 5 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Content6
Content
This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised
way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to
chapters (e.g. “Air conditioning”). The entire manual is divided into five large
parts which are:
1. Safety First
Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Operating instructions
Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-
able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Practical Tips
Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and
certain problems you can solve yourself.
4. Technical Specifications
Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index
At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
Leon_EN.book Seite 6 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving 7
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety
and for your passengers’ safety.
WARNING
• This manual contains important information about the operation of the
vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the
owner’s manual also contain further information that you should be aware
of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
• Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all
times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to
another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is a part of the occupant protection
system and can reduce the risk of injury in the event of acci-
dent.
Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event
of an accident, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The
following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
• three-point seat belts,
• belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats,
• belt tensioners for the front seats,
• belt height adjustment for the front seats,
• front airbags,
• side airbags in the front seat backrests,
• side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,
• curtain airbags,
• active front head restraints*,
• ISOFIX anchor points for child seats in the rear side seats with the ISOFIX
system,
• height-adjustable head restraints,
• head restraints with in-use position and non-use position
• adjustable steering column.
Leon_EN.book Seite 7 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving8
The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and
your passengers with the best possible protection in the event of an accident.
However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passen-
gers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,
how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how you and
your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety
equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your
passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone’s business!
Before starting every trip
The driver is responsible for the safety of the passengers and
the safe operation of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
– Make sure that the vehicle’s lights and turn signals are working
properly.
– Check tyre pressure.
– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
– Make sure all luggage is secured ⇒ page 16.
– Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly according
to your size.
– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the
head restraints in the in-use position ⇒ page 14.
– Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to
their height.
– Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly
applied seat belts ⇒ page 46.
– Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers
also to assume a proper sitting position ⇒ page 10.
– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to
fasten their seat belts properly ⇒ page 19.
What affects driving safety?
Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and
the personal behaviour of all occupants.
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.
When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any circum-
stance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road ⇒ ,
for this reason:
– Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by
passengers or telephone calls.
– Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
tion, alcohol, drugs).
– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
Leon_EN.book Seite 8 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving 9
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
– Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
– When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
– If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-
dents increases.
Leon_EN.book Seite 9 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving10
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a
safe and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the driver:
– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25
cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest
⇒ fig. 1.
– Move the driver seat forwards or backwards so that you are able
to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
your knees still slightly angled ⇒ .
– Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering
wheel.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ⇒ fig. 2.
– Move the backrest to an upright position so that your backrests
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper
distance between driver
and steering wheel
Fig. 2 Proper head
restraint position for
driver
Leon_EN.book Seite 10 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving 11
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
– Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 19.
– Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver seat ⇒ page 135.
WARNING
• An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
• Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between
the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel ⇒ page 10,
fig. 1. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect
you properly.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The work-
shop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
• When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock positions. This reduces the
risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
• Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position, or in any other
manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the
airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu-
vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag
system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back-
rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt
properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk
of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect
sitting position!
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position for front passenger
The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the
dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest
possible protection in the event that it is triggered.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
– Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible ⇒ .
– Move the backrest to an upright position so that your backrests
completely against it.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ⇒ page 13.
– Keep both feet in the footwell in front of the front passenger seat.
– Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 19.
It is possible to deactivate the passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
stances ⇒ page 25.
Adjusting the front passenger seat ⇒ page 138.
WARNING
• An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe
injuries.
• Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between
your chest and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the
airbag system cannot protect you properly.
Leon_EN.book Seite 11 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving12
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The work-
shop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never
rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An incorrect
sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a
sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain
severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden
braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection
when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is
wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to
the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the
belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
• Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum
protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet on the footwells, have the head restraints positioned for
use and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
consider the following:
– Adjust the head restraint to the correct position ⇒ page 14.
– Keep both feet in the footwell in front of the rear seat.
–Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 19.
– Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children
in the vehicle ⇒ page 46.
WARNING
• If the passengers on the rear seat are not sitting properly, they could
sustain severe injuries.
• Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protec-
tion.
• Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when backrests are in an
upright position and the passengers are wearing their seat belts properly.
If passengers on the rear seat are not sitting in an upright position, the risk
of injury due to incorrect positioning of the seat belt increases.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 12 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving 13
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum
protection.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, at the very least, at eye level
⇒ fig. 3 and ⇒ fig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 135.
WARNING
• Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the
passenger’s height.
Active head restraints*
Vehicle occupants are pressed into their seats during a rear end collision. The
resulting body pressure on the backrest activates the active head restraint*
on the front seat, which moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the same
time. This movement reduces the distance between the occupant’s head and
the head restraint, thus reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain
trauma.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the side
Leon_EN.book Seite 13 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving14
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the
passenger’s height.
Note
The active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant
applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by “falling” back into the
seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head
restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous,
as the active head restraints will return to the original position immediately
and are thus once again ready.
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of the
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations
Rear outer seat head restraints
– The rear outer seat head restraints have 4 positions.
–Three positions for use ⇒ fig. 5. In these positions, the head
restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along with
the rear seat belts.
– And one position for non-use.
– To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges
with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Fig. 5 Head restraints in
correct position
Leon_EN.book Seite 14 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving 15
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Centre rear head restraint
– The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head
restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).
WARNING
• Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the
head restraints are in the non-use position.
• Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat
rear head restraints.
• Risk of injury in case of an accident!
Caution
Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints. ⇒ page 136
Examples of incorrect sitting positions
An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to
occupants.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs
are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially
reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of
injury due to incorrect seat belt position. As the driver, you are
responsible for all vehicle occupants, especially children.
– Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in the
vehicle while travelling ⇒ .
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be
dangerous for all occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to
make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
• Never stand in the vehicle,
• never stand on the seats,
• never kneel on the seats,
• never tilt your backrest far to the rear,
• never lean against the dash panel,
• never lie on the rear bench,
• never sit on the front edge of a seat,
• never sit sideways,
• never lean out of a window,
• never put your feet out of a window,
• never put your feet on the dash panel,
• never put your feet on the surface of a seat,
• do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell,
• never travel without wearing the seat belt,
• do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
• Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries
if airbags are triggered, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incor-
rect sitting position.
• Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main-
tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to sit
properly and to stay in this position during the trip ⇒ page 10, “Proper
sitting position for occupants”.
Leon_EN.book Seite 15 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving16
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by objects
or floor mats.
– Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
– Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
tions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely
fastened on the footwell.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in
order to stop the vehicle.
Wearing suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good
feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
• Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving.
• Never place objects on the driver footwell. An object could move into
the pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driving
or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or
accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Floor mats on the driver side
Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened
in the footwell and do not impair operation of the pedals.
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip
and do not obstruct the pedals ⇒ .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to
prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a special-
ised dealership. Fasteners* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
WARNING
• If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju-
ries.
• Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
• Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor
mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk
of accident.
Storing objects
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
Leon_EN.book Seite 16 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving 17
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
– Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
– Place heavy objects as far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment.
–Place the heavy objects first.
– Secure heavy objects to the fastening rings ⇒ page 17.
WARNING
• Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could
cause serious injuries.
• Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on
the fastening rings.
• Use suitable straps to secure heavy objects.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown
forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of
injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating
airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into “missiles”. Risk of
fatal injury.
• Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle’s handling and lead to an acci-
dent. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style
accordingly, to avoid accidents.
• Never exceed the allowed axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If
the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving
characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries
and damage to the vehicle.
• Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the tailgate is
open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the door
behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all
the doors and tailgate when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the
vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.
• Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. All passen-
gers must have their seat belt fastened ⇒ page 19.
Note
• Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
• Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings*
There can be four fastening rings in the luggage compart-
ment for fastening luggage and other objects.
– Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings ⇒ in “Loading the
luggage compartment” on page 16.
– Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic
energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object. The
most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 17 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Safe driving18
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During
a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-
sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the
object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries
which might be sustained if this object strikes an occupant as it flies through
the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be further
increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
• If pieces of luggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings
with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could be sustained
in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
• To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward,
always use appropriate retaining cords which are secured to the fastening
rings.
• Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.
Leon_EN.book Seite 18 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts 19
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Seat belts
Brief introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!
In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,
how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
– Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
• If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries
increases.
• Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden
braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen-
gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.
• Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat
belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju-
ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is
equipped with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved only for four seats. Two front seats
and two rear seats.
WARNING
• More people than available seats must never be transported in your
vehicle.
• Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat
belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp*
The warning lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
– Fasten your seat belt securely.
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before
driving off.
– Protect children by using a child seat according to the child’s
height and weight.
Leon_EN.book Seite 19 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts20
After the ignition has been switched on, the warning lamp on the instru-
ment panel lights up
1)
if the driver has not fastened his/her seat belt, and an
acoustic signal is heard if the vehicle is driven at more than 30 km/h.
The warning lamp*
is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while
the ignition is switched on.
1)
Depending on the model version
Leon_EN.book Seite 20 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts 21
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Why wear seat belts?
Physical principles of frontal collisions
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy must be absorbed.
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on
collision: When a vehicle starts moving ⇒ fig. 6, a certain amount of energy
known as kinetic energy is produced in the vehicle and its occupants.
The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
weight of the vehicle and its passengers. The higher the speed and the
greater the weight, the more energy there is to be released in an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
doubles from 25 km/h to 50 km/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-
plied by four.
Because the passengers in our example are not restrained by seat belts, in
the case of a head-on collision all of their kinetic energy has to be absorbed
at the point of impact ⇒ fig. 7.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to 50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
sion can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a
head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was
Fig. 6 Vehicle about to hit
a wall: the occupants are
not wearing seat belts
Fig. 7 The vehicle hits
the wall: the occupants
are not wearing seat belts
Leon_EN.book Seite 21 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts22
travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on
collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
The general belief that the passengers can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great
that it is not possible to brace oneself with one’s hands. In a frontal collision,
unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with
the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
⇒ fig. 8.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags
provide only additional protection. All occupants (including the driver) must
wear seat belts properly during the trip. This will reduce the risk of severe
injuries in the event of an accident – regardless of whether an airbag is fitted
for the seat or not.
Note that airbags can be triggered only once. To achieve the best possible
protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be
protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
could otherwise be thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ⇒ fig. 9.
Fig. 8 A driver not
wearing a seat belt is
thrown forward violently.
Fig. 9 The unbelted rear
passenger is thrown
forward violently, hitting
the driver wearing a seat
belt.
Leon_EN.book Seite 22 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts 23
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Seat belt protection
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the vehicle.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of
injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially
reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a serious
accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection
provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a
seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be
fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, overturns or accidents in
which the airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that your
passengers have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!
Safety instructions on using seat belts
If seat belts are used correctly, they can reduce the risk of
injury in an accident.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.
– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not
damaged.
WARNING
• If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only
if you use them properly.
Fig. 10 A driver wearing
the seat belt properly is
secured by the belt in
sharp braking
Leon_EN.book Seite 23 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts24
• Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The
other passengers must also wear the seat belts at all times, otherwise they
run the risk of being injured.
• The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not posi-
tioned correctly.
• Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
• Keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as the vehicle
is in motion.
• Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal
injury.
• The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.
• The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses
or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
• Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any
sharp edges.
• Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi-
tion.
• Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the
proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
• The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other
objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
• Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter
the position of the belt webbing.
• Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors
or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci-
dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular
intervals.
• Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be
replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if
there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
• Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
• The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work
properly ⇒ page 211.
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the front and rear occupants are locked into
position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Fig. 11 Belt buckle and
latch plate of seat belt
Leon_EN.book Seite 24 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts 25
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
– Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
– To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒ page 24, fig. 11.
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in steep areas or
bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt
is locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt
tensioners ⇒ page 28.
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
• The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an
upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
• Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the
seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
• If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her
properly. An incorrectly positioned seat belt can cause extremely severe
injuries.
• Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in
group 0, 0+ or 1 ⇒ page 46.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they are
properly positioned.
Fig. 12 Correct seat belt
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from front
Fig. 13 Correct seat belt
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from side
Leon_EN.book Seite 25 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts26
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
• belt height adjustment for the front seats.
• front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder,
never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso
⇒ page 25, fig. 12.
• The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the
stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis ⇒ page 25,
fig. 13. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
• Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 23.
Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly
The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to
wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnancy.
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the seat belt
is properly positioned ⇒ page 25.
– Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly ⇒ page 10.
– Holding the latch plate, pull the belt evenly across your chest and
as low as possible over the pelvis ⇒ fig. 14.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the corresponding seat
and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒ .
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
Fig. 14 Positioning seat
belts during pregnancy
Leon_EN.book Seite 26 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts 27
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
• For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as
possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so
that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
• Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 23.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
– Press the red button on the belt buckle ⇒ fig. 15. The latch plate
is released and springs out ⇒ .
– Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim
is not damaged
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you
increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Adjusting the seat belt height
Seat belt height adjusters can be used to adjust the position
of the seat belt at the shoulder.
The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can be used to adjust the
proper belt position at the shoulder.
Fig. 15 Removing latch
plate from buckle
Fig. 16 Location of the
belt height adjuster
Leon_EN.book Seite 27 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts28
– Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this
position ⇒ page 27, fig. 16.
– Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted
the seat belt ⇒ page 25.
– After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal
injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs
substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe
or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially
increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has
assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are respon-
sible for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
– Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the
vehicle is moving ⇒ .
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts
properly and to wear them for the whole journey.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of seat belts ⇒ page 23.
Seat belt tensioners
Function of the seat belt tensioner
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on the front seats are
retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the front occupants are equipped with belt tensioners.
Sensors will only trigger the belt tensioners during severe head-on, lateral
and rear collisions, and only if the seat belt is actually being worn. This
retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occu-
pants.
The seat belt tensioner can be triggered only once.
The seat belt tensioners will not be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
side or rear collision, if the vehicle overturns or in situations where no large
forces act on the front, side or rear of the vehicle.
Note
• If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
• The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are familiar
with these regulations, which are also available to you.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 28 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seat belts 29
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Service and disposal of belt tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the
seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install
parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be
damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt
tensioners function incorrectly or not at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
• Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase
the risk of severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or
may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
• Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt
tensioners or seat belts.
• The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and automatic retractor cannot be
repaired.
• Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal
and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be
performed by a specialised workshop only.
• The belt tensioners will only provide protection for one accident and
must be changed if they have been activated.
Leon_EN.book Seite 29 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system30
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting
position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before driving:
– Always wear the seat belt properly ⇒ page 19.
– Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly
⇒ page 10.
– Adjust the front passenger seat correctly ⇒ page 11.
– Adjust the head restraint correctly ⇒ page 13.
– Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle ⇒ page 46.
The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an
incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause
you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle
assume a correct sitting position while travelling.
A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat
belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,
the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This
also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the
front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when trig-
gered, providing their maximum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
dent, the angle of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ation rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the
vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the
control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side
and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible
damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a
determining factor for the airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
• Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi-
tion can lead to critical or fatal injuries.
• All occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can
sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. Children up to 12
years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never transport children in
the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is not appro-
priate for their age, size or weight.
• If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while
travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially
increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further
increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
• To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the
seat belt properly ⇒ page 19.
Leon_EN.book Seite 30 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system 31
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
• Always adjust the front seats properly.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
The front passenger airbag is a serious risk for a child if it is activated. The
front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if he/she is transported in a
rear-facing child seat. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the
rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such force that it can cause critical or fatal injuries.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.
That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front
passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch ⇒ page 44.
When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size
of each child ⇒ page 46.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,
an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
WARNING
• If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child
of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
• Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the
front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju-
ries if the front passenger airbag is triggered.
• An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat
and hurl it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• If, under special circumstances, it is necessary to transport a child in a
rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential
that you observe the following safety measures:
− Deactivate the front passenger airbag ⇒ page 44, “Deactivating
airbags*”.
− The child seat must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for
use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag.
− Follow the installation instructions given by the child seat manufac-
turer and observe the safety instructions ⇒ page 46, “Child safety”.
− Before properly installing the child seat, push the front passenger
seat completely backwards so that the greatest possible distance to
the front passenger airbag is ensured.
− Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being
pushed completely back.
− The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright
position.
Warning lamp for airbag and seat belt tensioner T
This warning lamp monitors the airbag and seat belt
tensioner system.
The warning lamp monitors all airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehicle,
including control units and wiring connections.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 31 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system32
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly monitored
electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp
T
lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel* shows
AIRBAG / TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp
T :
• does not light up when the ignition is switched on,
• after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,
• turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,
• lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In
addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the
display of the instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic
signal is given. In this event, you should have a specialised workshop check
the system immediately.
If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the
indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off
if there is no fault.
WARNING
• If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot
properly perform its protective function.
• If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag
system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered
correctly.
Repairs, maintenance and disposal of airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle.
If work is carried out on the airbag system or parts have to be removed and
fitted on the system when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag
system may be damaged. In the event of an accident this could cause the
airbag to inflate incorrectly or not inflate at all.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the airbag are scrapped. Specialised workshops and vehicle
disposal centres are familiar with these requirements.
WARNING
• If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the airbags are used
incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may
fail to inflate, or could inflate in the wrong circumstances.
• Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the surface
of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dash panel, and do not
obstruct or modify them in any way.
• It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or tele-
phone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
• To clean the steering wheel or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a
water-moistened cloth. Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module
surface with cleaners containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to
become porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts could become
detached and cause injuries.
• Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag
system.
• Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag
components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should
be performed only by a specialised workshop. Specialised workshops have
the necessary tools, repair information and qualified personnel.
Leon_EN.book Seite 32 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system 33
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
• We strongly recommend you to go to a specialised workshop for all
work on the airbag system.
• Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
• The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once
they have deployed.
For the sake of the environment
The airbags, which are a special type of waste, must be disposed of through
an authorised service, because they contain pyrotechnic elements.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 33 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system34
front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ⇒ fig. 17 and
the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ⇒ fig. 18.
Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front
occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a
severe frontal collision ⇒ page 37, “Safety notes on the front airbag system”.
In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants, the seat
belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the airbags
can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle’s overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety ⇒ page 19,
“Brief introduction”.
The main parts of the front airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
• the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front
passenger,
• a warning lamp T on the instrument panel ⇒ page 31
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning
lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the warning lamp
T:
• does not light up when the ignition is switched on ⇒ page 31
• after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,
• turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,
• lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving.
Fig. 17 Driver airbag
located in steering wheel
Fig. 18 Front passenger
airbag located in dash
panel
Leon_EN.book Seite 34 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system 35
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
• the ignition is switched off
• there is a minor frontal collision,
• there is a side collision,
• there is a rear-end collision
• the vehicle turns over
WARNING
• The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the
occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, “Proper sitting position for
occupants”.
• If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal colli-
sion the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of front airbags
Inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury.
The airbag system is designed so that the airbags for the driver and front
passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
deploy in front of the driver and front passenger ⇒ fig. 19. The fully deployed
airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to
reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. After the collision, the
airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
Fig. 19 Inflated front
airbags
Leon_EN.book Seite 35 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system36
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of
fire in the vehicle.
Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver
and front passenger airbags are triggered ⇒ fig. 20. The airbag covers
remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fig. 20 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags
are triggered
Leon_EN.book Seite 36 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system 37
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Safety notes on the front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of
at least 25cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum
distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the
vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and
head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the
occupant.
• If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while
travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially
increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further
increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
• Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint
system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain
serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates ⇒ page 46, “Child
safety”.
• The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags
must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.
• The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once
they have deployed.
• It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or
telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The side airbags are located in the backrest cushions of the driver seat
⇒ fig. 21 and the front passenger seat as well as in the rear seats. The loca-
tions are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the backrests.
Together with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat occu-
pants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side
collision ⇒ page 40, “Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag
system”.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their
normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
hold the passengers on the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position
where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.
Fig. 21 Side airbag in
driver seat
Leon_EN.book Seite 37 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system38
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle’s overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,
not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your
safety ⇒ page 19, “Brief introduction”.
The side airbag system will not be triggered if:
• the ignition is switched off
• there is a minor side collision
• there is a frontal collision
• there is a rear-end collision
• the vehicle turns over
The main parts of the airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
• the side airbags in the sides of the backrests of the front and rear seats
• a warning lamp T on the instrument panel ⇒ page 31
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning
lamp will light up for approx. 4seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
WARNING
• In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not
correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to
air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.
• Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
• Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the
panels have not been correctly fitted.
• Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have
been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been
correctly closed.
• Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers
or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.
• Any work carried out to the doors should be made in a specialised work-
shop.
• The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the
occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, “Proper sitting position for
occupants”.
• If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a side collision,
the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 38 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system 39
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Operation of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
many side impact collisions.
In some side collisions, the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle ⇒ page 39, fig. 22.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of
fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the
upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Fig. 22 Illustration of
principle: inflated side
airbags on left side of
vehicle
Leon_EN.book Seite 39 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system40
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
• If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated
correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if
the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
• In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
• Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the
deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or
other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach
any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the
protection offered by the side airbags.
• The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
• Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the
backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the
side airbags would not be triggered.
• Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats
with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your
vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the
use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously
reducing the airbag’s effectiveness ⇒ page 212, “Accessories, parts
replacement and modifications”.
• Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the
side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop.
• The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once
they have deployed.
• When children assume an incorrect sitting position, they expose them-
selves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This is
particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat
and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have critical
consequences including serious injury or death ⇒ page 46, “Child safety”.
• Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat)
should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults
may occur during the airbag system operation.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
• The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the
interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and
head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in
any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must
be made in a specialised workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 40 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system 41
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
⇒ fig. 23 and are identified with the text “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision ⇒ page 42, “Safety notes on the operation of the
curtain airbag system”.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle’s overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety ⇒ page 19,
“Brief introduction”.
The main parts of the curtain airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
• the curtain airbags (airbags with gas generator) for the driver, front
passenger and passengers on the rear seats,
• a warning lamp T on the instrument panel ⇒ page 31
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically.
The curtain airbag system will not be triggered if:
• the ignition is switched off
Fig. 23 Location of head airbags on the left side of the
vehicle
Leon_EN.book Seite 41 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system42
• there is a frontal collision
• there is a rear-end collision
• the vehicle turns over
• there is a minor side collision
WARNING
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked imme-
diately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during
a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
of the vehicle ⇒ fig. 24.
In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
process, the curtain airbag covers the side windows and door pillars.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of
fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and
help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
• In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
• For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must be disconnected in those
vehicles fitted with a passenger compartment separation screen. See an
Authorised Service Centre to make this adjustment.
Fig. 24 Deployed curtain
airbags
Leon_EN.book Seite 42 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system 43
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
• There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu-
pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags
so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the
greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been
expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side
windows ⇒ page 212, “Accessories, parts replacement and modifica-
tions”.
• The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not
hang the clothes on coat hangers.
• The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once
they have deployed.
• Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of
the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining)
should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults
may occur during the airbag system operation.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
• The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the
interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and
head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in
any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must
be made in a specialised workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 43 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system44
Deactivating airbags*
Front passenger airbag deactivation
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, only the front airbag is
deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain activated.
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
– Switch the ignition off.
– Turn the ignition switch in the key operated switch in the glove
compartment to the position OFF ⇒ fig. 25.
– Check that the warning lamp “OFF” on the instrument panel
⇒ fig. 26 remains lit when the ignition is switched on ⇒ .
Activating the front passenger airbag
– Switch the ignition off.
– Turn the ignition key in the key-operated switch in the glove
compartment to the position ON ⇒ fig. 25.
Fig. 25 In the glove
compartment: switch for
activating and deacti-
vating the front passenger
airbag
Fig. 26 Warning lamp for
deactivated passenger
airbag in centre console
Leon_EN.book Seite 44 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Airbag system 45
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
– Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel
⇒ page 44, fig. 26 does not light up when the ignition is
switched on ⇒ .
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated
switch.
• You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use
a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. ⇒ page 46, “Child safety”.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the
airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
• Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat
unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. Otherwise, there is a
risk of death. If under exceptional circumstances it is necessary to trans-
port a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must
always disable the front passenger airbag.
• As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger
seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
• Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other-
wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, which could cause the airbag
to not deploy properly or not deploy at all.
• When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG
OFF is not continuously lit up, there may be a fault in the airbag system:
− Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a specialised
workshop.
− Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front
passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault
in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju-
ries.
− It is unpredictable whether the front passenger airbag will deploy in
the event of an accident. Warn all your passengers of this.
• When using the ignition key to activate/deactivate the front passenger
airbag, only the front passenger airbag will be activated/deactivated. The
side airbag and head airbag on the passenger side will remain active.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 45 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Child safety46
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
For safety reasons we recommend that children under 12 years of age travel
on the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children trav-
elling on the rear seat must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety reasons,
the child seat should be installed in the centre of the rear seat or behind the
front passenger seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to
children. ⇒ page 21, “Why wear seat belts?”.
But unlike adults, children do not have muscle and bone structures fully
developed. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Programme, which includes systems for all ages made by “Peke”
2)
.
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note
⇒ page 47.
We recommend you to include the manufacturer’s Child Seat instruction
manual together with the on-board documentation.
2)
Not for all countries
Leon_EN.book Seite 46 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Child safety 47
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
– Protect your children by properly using the appropriate child
seats ⇒ page 48.
– Always ensure that the seat belt is properly positioned according
to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child
seat.
– When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.
– Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least
every two hours.
WARNING
• Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat
unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could lead to a
risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in
exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag must always be disabled ⇒ page 44, “Deactivating
airbags*”. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to
the highest position.
• For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to disconnect
the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.
• All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting
position and be properly belted in while travelling.
• Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially
fatal injuries to the child!
• Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly
secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident,
the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries
to themselves and to the other passengers.
• If children assume an improper sitting position when the vehicle is
moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly important
if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system
is triggered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or even death.
• A suitable child seat can protect your child!
• Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the
vehicle.
• Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold
inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
• Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat
belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and
neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
• Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on
any sharp edges.
• Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision
or in sudden braking manoeuvres.
• The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the seat belt is
properly positioned ⇒ page 24, “Seat belts”.
• Only one child may occupy a child seat ⇒ page 48, “Child seats”.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 47 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Child safety48
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic
Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: children up to 10 kg
Group 0+: children up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Group 0: For babies from about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration ⇒ fig. 27.
Group 0+: For babies from about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to include the manufacturer’s Child Seat instruction
manual together with the on-board documentation.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of
child seats ⇒ page 47.
Fig. 27 A group 0 rear-
facing child seat fitted on
the rear seat.
Leon_EN.book Seite 48 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Child safety 49
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the rear
of the vehicle are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing
between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to include the manufacturer’s Child Seat instruction
manual together with the on-board documentation.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of
child seats ⇒ page 47.
Group 2 and 3 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to include the manufacturer’s Child Seat instruction
manual together with the on-board documentation.
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
protected by group 2 child seats together with properly adjusted seat belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
metres tall are best protected by seat cushions with head restraints together
with properly worn seat belts ⇒ fig. 29.
Fig. 28 A category 1
forward-facing child seat
fitted on the rear seat.
Fig. 29 Forward-facing
child seat installed on rear
seat.
Leon_EN.book Seite 49 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Child safety50
WARNING
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre
of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie
close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the
pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if
necessary to take up any slack ⇒ page 24, “Seat belts”.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒ page 47.
Leon_EN.book Seite 50 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Child safety 51
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on
the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
• Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
• Child seats in groups 0, 0+ and 1 with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* systems
can be secured without using the seatbelt, thanks to the ISOFIX and Top
Tether* securing rings ⇒ page 52.
U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age
category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult
seat belt).
*: Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, as high as
possible and always deactivate the airbag.
L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX and Top Tether* anchors.
WARNING
• When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a
restraint system suitable for age, weight and size.
• Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat
unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could cause fatal
injuries to the child! However, if, in exceptional cases, it is necessary to
transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag
⇒ page 44, “Deactivating airbags*” must always be disabled and the seat
adjusted to its highest position, where possible.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒ page 47.
Category Weight
Seat locations
Front
passenger
Rear outer Rear centre
Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U
Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U
Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U
Leon_EN.book Seite 51 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Child safety52
Child seats fastened with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
system
Child seats with the ISOFIX or Top Tether* system can be
secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear outer seats.
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
– Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.
– Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings until the child
seat can be heard to engage securely. If the child seat is
equipped with Toptether* anchor points, secure it to the corre-
spondent ring. Observe the manufacturer’s instructions.
– Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the
rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear
floor. The access to the “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear seat backrest and
the seat cushioning. The Top Tether* anchors are located at the rear of the
backs seats (behind the seat or in the luggage compartment).
Child seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* attachment system are available
from the Authorised Service Centres.
WARNING
• The securing rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX and Top
Tether* child seats.
• Never secure child seats that do not have the ISOFIX and Top Tether*
system, retaining belts or other objects to the securing rings – this could
result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!
• Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly using the ISOFIX and Top
Tether* securing rings.
Fig. 30 ISOFIX securing
rings
Leon_EN.book Seite 52 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
53
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Leon_EN.book Seite 53 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
54
Fig. 31 Dash panel
Leon_EN.book Seite 54 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 55
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Operating Instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the dash panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . .
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air vent
Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system*
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel:
− Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ Driver front airbag
Windscreen wiper and washer lever and operation of the
multifunction display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for
− Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio/Navigator*
Right seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove compartment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls on the centre console:
− Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Tyre pressure monitoring
− Park Pilot* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Cigarette lighter / Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Exterior mirror adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Start-Stop* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag . . . . . .
Pedals
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering column control lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button for opening and closing the front windows . . . . . . . .
Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . .
A
1
A
2
117
A
3
121
A
4
121
A
5
A
6
124, 181
A
7
91
A
8
57
61
77
A
9
30
A
10
127, 63
A
11
139
A
12
148
150
154
A
13
A
14
139
A
15
30
A
16
141
A
17
142
A
18
171
A
19
99
187
178
143
132
167
A
20
176
A
21
122
A
22
44
A
23
A
24
162
A
25
160
A
26
221
A
27
112
A
28
112
A
29
112
Leon_EN.book Seite 55 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit56
Note
Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain model
versions or are optional extras.
Leon_EN.book Seite 56 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 57
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument panel
Fuel gauge ⇒ page 58
Multifunction display ⇒ page 61
Engine coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 58
Rev counter ⇒ page 59
Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button ⇒ page 59
Speedometer ⇒ page 59
Fig. 32 Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument
panel
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
Leon_EN.book Seite 57 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit58
Fuel gauge z and reserve indicator
Instrument panel: fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve area ⇒ fig. 33 (arrow), the warning
lamp will light up and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to
refuel. At this point there are still 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
The following text appears on the instrument panel display
3)
PLEASE REFUEL
[XXX]*.
Engine coolant temperature gauge v
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads ⇒ fig. 34.
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions, the needle should be in the middle section of
the scale. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard,
especially at high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern as long
as the warning lamp does not light up and no warning message* appears on
the instrument panel display.
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp* ⇒ page 77, fig. 48 will light up if the needle is in the
warning zone. The following warning message appears on the instrument
3)
Depending on the model version.
Fig. 33 Instrument panel:
fuel gauge
Fig. 34 Instrument panel:
engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 58 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 59
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
panel display
4)
. Stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the
coolant level ⇒ page 228 ⇒ .
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain
technical assistance.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warn-
ings ⇒ page 221.
Caution
Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Rev counter
The rev counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone ⇒ page 57, fig. 32 indicates the maximum
engine speed operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to
change up to a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot off the
accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution
The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up into higher gears early will help you to reduce fuel consumption,
emissions and minimise engine noise.
Speedometer
The speedometer is equipped with a digital odometer and a trip recorder, in
addition to a service intervals display.
During the running-in period, the instructions shown on ⇒ page 193 should
be followed.
Setting the digital clock*
The digital clock is located in the instrument panel display.
– Turn the setting knob ⇒ page 57, fig. 32 clockwise until the
first “click” to set the hour. The hour will flash. To change the
hour, press the button.
– Turn the setting knob clockwise to the second “click” to set the
minutes. The minutes will flash. To change the minutes, press the
button.
4)
Depending on the model version.
A
4
A
5
Leon_EN.book Seite 59 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit60
LPG system*
LPG gauge
LPG system filler level display
The LPG tank ⇒ in the spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres at an
outside temperature of 15 °C ⇒ page 216, “Refuelling with LPG”.
The charge level can be checked on the analogue gas gauge located on the
instrument panel ⇒ fig. 35. When the level reaches reserve, a notification
text is displayed on the screen. Refill with LPG at the earliest opportunity.
If, while driving in LPG mode, a sudden warning signal is heard and the
warning LPG fault, contact workshop is displayed on the screen
5)
, it means
that there is a fault in the LPG system. Take the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop to check the LPG system.
WARNING
LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause severe
burns and other injury.
• Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.
• When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical,
to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Note
• The values shown in the average fuel consumption and distance to empty
indications on the multifunction display (MFI)
6)
on the instrument panel
5)
are
approximate values only.
• Two different consumption values are given on the MFI, depending on
whether the vehicle is running in GAS or Petrol mode.
• Please check the fuel level on the fuel level gauge on the instrument panel
⇒ page 58
• If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside temper-
ature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on LPG.
Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.
5)
Depending on the model version
Fig. 35 Instrument panel:
gas gauge.
6)
Optional equipment
Leon_EN.book Seite 60 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 61
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Digital instrument panel display
Display (without warning or information texts)
The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other
things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector
lever position.
Digital clock display ⇒ page 59. On the right of the display: Selector
lever position display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of
the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for tiptronic)* is high-
lighted.
Outside temperature.
Odometer or flexible service interval display*.
Displayed categories*
The display on the instrument panel shows the mileage and
trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.
Clock: “Setting the time”. On the right of the display: Selector lever posi-
tion display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of the
selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic) is highlighted.
There are optional and automatic displays in this field.
– Optional indicators: e.g. those on the multifunction display (MFI)
– Automatic indicators: Information and warning messages.
– Menus providing further information and which can be used to make
diverse settings are also shown: “Instrument panel menus”
Outside temperature.
Odometer or flexible service interval display.
Fig. 36 Detailed view of
the instrument panel:
screen with different indi-
cators
A
1
A
2
A
3
Fig. 37 Digital instru-
ment panel display
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
Leon_EN.book Seite 61 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit62
Recommended gear display*
This display helps to save fuel.
Use the gear display to save fuel. If you are driving in the correct gear, a dot
will be shown next to the gear display. If you are not in the correct gear, an
arrow will appear next to the gear display indicating whether you should
change up or down.
Odometer or flexible service interval display
Odometer
The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance
covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates
steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by holding down
the reset button for a few seconds.
Service interval display
Vehicles with Service intervals dependent on time/distance travelled already
have certain service intervals set. The intervals are calculated individually in
vehicles with LongLife service.
The service interval display only indicates the dates of services that include
engine oil change. The dates of all other services, such as Inspection Service
or brake fluid change, appear in the sticker on the door pillar or in the Main-
tenance Programme.
A Service pre-warning will appear in the odometer if a service is due soon. A
“spanner” symbol appears and the display “km” with the distance that can
be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will change
after approximately 10 seconds. A “clock symbol” appears and the number
of days until the service appointment should be carried out. The following
message is shown in the instrument panel display*:
Service in
[XXXX]
km
or
[XXXX]
days
The service message will disappear approximately 20 seconds after the igni-
tion is switched on or the engine is running. The normal display can be
resumed by briefly pressing the reset button on the trip counter or by pressing
the button on the steering wheel controls.
With the ignition on, you can check the current service message at any
moment in the Vehicle status menu or turning the reset button to access the
service display.
An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day
information.
Fig. 38 Gear display
OK
Leon_EN.book Seite 62 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 63
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Indications for vehicles with LongLife service
Technical progress has made it possible to considerably reduce servicing
requirements. With the LongLife System, SEAT ensures that your vehicle only
has an interval service when it is necessary. The length of the service intervals
(max. two years) is determined by factors such as conditions under which the
vehicle is used and personal driving style.
The service pre-warning will first appear 20 days before the date on which the
service is due. The distance travelled is rounded off to the nearest 100 km
and the time to full days. The current service message can only be consulted
500 km after the last service. Until that time, only dashes are displayed.
Note
• If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indi-
cated after 15,000 km or one year and will not be calculated individually.
• Do not reset the display between service intervals as the display will
otherwise be incorrect.
• In LongLife Service vehicles, if the battery is disconnected for a long
period, the days remaining until the next service cannot be calculated. There-
fore, the service message displays on the instrument panel may be incorrect.
Take into account the maximum authorised service intervals.
Multifunction display (MFI)*
The multifunction display (MFI) shows you information on the
journey and fuel consumption.
Fig. 39 Rocker buttons A
and B. Steering wheel
controls.
Fig. 40 Digital instru-
ment panel display
Leon_EN.book Seite 63 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit64
The multifunction system uses two automatic memories: 1 - Actual
memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown
in the upper right-hand corner of the display.
Selecting a memory
– When the ignition is on, briefly press button ⇒ page 63, fig. 39
on the windscreen wiper lever to change from one memory to
another or press button on the steering wheel controls
⇒ page 63, fig. 39.
Resetting a memory
– Select the memory that you would like to reset.
– Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or button
on the steering wheel controls for at least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption rates from the
moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is
continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will
be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total memory 2 collects the trip data for any number of individual jour-
neys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a
total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance travelled.
The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is
reached.
Information in the multifunction display (MFI)*
You can switch between the following displays in the multifunction display
(MFI) by operating rocker switch ⇒ fig. 41 on the windscreen wiper lever.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Fig. 41 Rocker buttons A
and B. Steering wheel
controls.
Fig. 42 Digital instru-
ment panel display:
average fuel consumption
indicator.
A
B
Leon_EN.book Seite 64 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 65
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Memory displays
• Driving speed
• Journey duration
• Average speed
• Distance
• Distance to empty
• Average fuel consumption
• Current fuel consumption
• Outside temperature display
• Speed warning
Km/h - Driving speed
Driving speed is digitally shown in the display.
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition
was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Økm/h - Average speed
The average speed will be shown after running a distance of approximately
100 metres. Until then dashes will appear in the display. The display will be
updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
km - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
z Km - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel
consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
tions as a reference.
Ø l/100 km - Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption will be shown ⇒ page 64, fig. 42 after a
distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Until then dashes
will appear in the display. The display will be updated every 5 seconds while
the vehicle is in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
l/100 km or l/h - Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the
vehicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position
with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion ⇒ page 195.
Outside temperature display
The measurement range extends from -45 °C to +58 °C. At temperatures
below +4 °C, an ice crystal symbol is displayed and a warning sounds if the
vehicle is moving at more than 20 km/h (ice danger warning). This symbol
will flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the outside temperature
rises above +4 °C or 6 °C if it was already lit.
Set speed indicator
When driving at the required speed, enter the speed indicator mode and
press the button (Reset), the display remembers the indicated speed. If
the indicated speed is exceeded, a warning message is displayed on the
screen
7)
and an acoustic signal is given.
This may be deactivated by pressing the button (Reset).
7)
Depending on the model version, the message on the screen may vary and may be
represented by flashing of the speed indication or by a speed message.
A
A
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 65 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit66
The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h
within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake symbol”
is not shown. For this reason you should not rely exclusively on this display
- Risk of accident!
Note
When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature as
a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
Warning or information message in the display
Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and
warning/information reports.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-
tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-
cated by symbols with warning or information messages in the display. An
acoustic warning is given in certain cases.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols
(priority 2)
Information text
In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive information
in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
Note
In the case of screens without warning or information texts, faults are indi-
cated exclusively by the warning lamps.
Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain
professional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue
until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
message.
Examples of priority 1 warning messages (red)
• Brake system symbol H with the warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID
SERVICE MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL.
• Coolant symbol v with the warning message STOP SEE COOLANT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
• Engine oil pressure symbol E with the warning message STOP ENGINE
OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Warning reports, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible.
A
B
Leon_EN.book Seite 66 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 67
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
If several priority 2 warning messages are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After
a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown
as a reminder at the side of the display.
Priority 2 warning messages will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
messages have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning messages (yellow):
8)
• Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.
• Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank
⇒ page 230.
8)
Depending on the model version.
Leon_EN.book Seite 67 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit68
Instrument panel menus*
Example of menu use
All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according
to the following procedure. The instrument panel menus may
vary according to the version of the model.
The setting of a speed warning will be used as an example of how to
use the menus. This is a good idea if you are, for example, using
winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of the vehicle.
1. Open the main menu with the MFI lever
– Switch the ignition on.
– Hold down button for two seconds to return to main menu
from other menu. It may be necessary to repeat this operation
until the main menu is displayed.
2. Open the menu “Configuration” with the MFI lever
– To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end
of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed between
two lines and there will also be a triangle on the right.
– Select menu Configuration.
Fig. 43 Windscreen wiper
lever: button A to confirm
the menu selection and
rocker switch B to change
the menu
Fig. 44 Steering wheel
controls: button A to
confirm the menu selec-
tion and switch B to
change the menu
A
B
Leon_EN.book Seite 68 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 69
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
– Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura-
tion menu is opened.
2. Access the Configuration menu with the steering wheel controls
– To access the “Configuration” menu, press button
⇒ page 68, fig. 44 until the menu is displayed. Now you are in
this menu.
3. Open the main menu “Winter tyres”
– Select option Winter tyres using switch .
– Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.
4. Program a speed limit warning
– Use button to select the menu entry +10 km/h or -10 km/h
and press button to either increase or decrease the set speed.
5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning
– Use switch to select the menu point On / Off and press the
button to switch the speed warning on or off. If the speed
warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---
6. To close the menu “Winter tyres”
–In the menu select Back.
The function “Winter tyres” sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the
vehicle reaches the set speed.
Example menu “Winter tyres”
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
A
A
A
C
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
In the menu
Winter tyres
Function
Name of menu displayed
X km/h The current set speed is displayed
or --- or dashes will be shown if the function is deac-
tivated.
On / Off If the function is activated or deactivated
+10 km/h The set value increases by 10 km/h
-10 km/h The set value decreases by 10 km/h
Back The menu “Winter tyres” is closed and the last
displayed menu is shown.
Leon_EN.book Seite 69 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit70
Main menu
The menu provides access to the different display functions
(only with the MFI lever).
Open main menu
– Switch the ignition on.
– Press and hold the eject button for at least two seconds. It
may be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu is
displayed.
Select a menu from the main menu
– To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end
of rocker switch . The selected option is displayed between
two horizontal lines.
– Press button to select the entry.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 68
Fig. 45 Windscreen wiper
lever (MFI): button A to
confirm the menu selec-
tion and rocker switch B to
change the menu
Fig. 46 Digital instru-
ment panel display: Main
menu
Main menu Function
Multifunction dis-
play
Change to the multifunction display (MFI): “Multi-
function display (MFI)”
Audio This menu displays the available information for the
active audio source (radio station, CD audio track /
MP3 / USB / iPod / Bluetooth audio
a)
/ call
information
a)
.
Navigation This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with
a navigation system. The navigation system must be
switched on. When the route guidance is activated,
the turning arrows and proximity bars are displayed.
The display is similar to that of the Navigation sys-
tem.
If the route guidance is not activated, the direction of
travel (compass) and the name of the street along
which you are driving are shown.
A
B
A
B
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 70 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 71
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Multifunction display menu (MFI)
The multifunction display (MFI) shows you information on the
journey and fuel consumption.
The multifunction display (MFI) has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip memory
and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory is shown on the upper right hand
section of the display ⇒ fig. 47 at all times.
Open the multifunction display menu
–Select the Multifunction display menu from the main menu ⇒ page 70
and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunc-
tion lever*.
Selecting a memory
– To change from one memory to another, briefly press button
⇒ page 68, fig. 43 ⇒ page 68 on the windscreen wiper lever or the
button on the multifunction lever ⇒ page 68, fig. 44 ⇒ page 68 while
the ignition is switched on.
Tele ph one This menu is only available in vehicles with radio unit
if the vehicle is fitted with the telephone function. In
vehicles fitted with a radio navigation system, this
menu is available in the central unit (navigator)
⇒ Booklet “SEAT Media System 2.1”.
Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information
texts: “Vehicle status menu”
This option flashes when one of these texts is dis-
played.
Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when
using winter tyres, units, language, independent
heating, the Light and visibility menu and the Con-
venience menu to be reset.
a)
Only in vehicles fitted with a radio navigation system.
Fig. 47 Multifunction
display (MFI) instrument
panel display.
OK
A
A
OK
Leon_EN.book Seite 71 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit72
Resetting a memory
– Select the memory where you wish to erase the values.
– Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on
the multifunction* steering wheel for at least two seconds.
The journey memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the
moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is
continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will
be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-
vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)
up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance trav-
elled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is
reached.
Memory indications
The following data can be viewed on the multifunction display using the
rocker switch ⇒ page 68, fig. 43 ⇒ page 68 on the windscreen wiper
lever or by pressing button or ⇒ page 68, fig. 44 on the multifunction
steering wheel*.
• Duration
• Current fuel consumption
• Average fuel consumption
• Distance to empty
•
Distance
• Average speed
• Auxiliary speed
• Digital display of speed
9)
• Speed warning at --- km/h
Personal selection of display
The driver can establish which displays are shown on the instrument panel
display as required:
• Select the submenu Multifunction Display Data from the Configuration
menu ⇒ page 74.
• The displays can be activated or deactivated individually by marking the
required option and pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or
the multifunction steering wheel*.
Duration in h and min
The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition
was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Current fuel consumption in l/100 km or l/h
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litres/100 km whilst the
vehicle is in motion or in litres/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary posi-
tion with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion ⇒ page 160.
Average consumption in l/100 km
The average fuel consumption will be shown after a distance of approximately
100 metres has been travelled. Until then dashes will appear in the display.
The display will be updated every five seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
Fuel range in km
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel
consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
tions as a reference.
9)
It is not possible to see whether the alternative speed display is activated.
A
A OK
A
B
OK
Leon_EN.book Seite 72 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 73
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Distance travelled in km
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Average speed in km/h
The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100
metres has been travelled. Until then dashes will appear in the display. The
display will be updated every five seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
Alternative speed display (mph or km/h)
The speed is also displayed in a second unit of measurement other than that
used on the speedometer.
• Select the menu Configuration using the rocker switch on the windscreen
wiper lever or the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel* ⇒ page 68.
• Select the option Auxiliary speed and press on the windscreen wiper
lever or the multifunction steering wheel*.
Digital display of speed
The instrument panel display gives the speed in digital format
9)
.
Speed warning at --- km/h
This function may help you to keep within the speed limits. Press the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunction steering wheel*
to select the current speed. The instrument panel display gives the selected
speed, for example, Speed warning 120 km/h. You have five seconds to reset
the speed between 30 km/h and 250 km/h using rocker switch or buttons
or on the multifunction steering wheel*. Press the button or wait
five seconds until the speed is stored and the warning is activated. If the set
speed is exceeded, an acoustic signal is heard and a warning message is
displayed until the speed is reduced to at least 4 km/h below the stored
speed. The function is switched off by pressing the button again. Speed
warning --- km/h is now displayed on the instrument panel.
Outside temperature display
The measurement margin ranges from -40 °C (-40 °F) to +50 °C (+125 °F). At
outside temperatures below +4 °C (+39.2 °F), the snowflake symbol (ice
danger warning) appears in addition to the outside temperature display. This
symbol flashes for a few seconds and remains lit until the outside tempera-
ture rises above +6 °C (+42.8 °F).
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake symbol”
is not shown. For this reason you should not rely exclusively on this display
- Risk of accident!
Note
• There are different instrument panels; therefore the multifunction display
may vary.
• When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the
temperature displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temper-
ature as a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
• Vehicles with a multifunction steering wheel* do not have buttons on the
windscreen wiper lever. The multifunction display can only be controlled from
the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel*.
Vehicle status menu
This menu shows warning or information texts
Open Vehicle Condition menu
– Select the option Vehicle status from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press button on the windscreen wiper lever
⇒ page 70, fig. 45. or
OK
OK
A
A
A
B
OK
OK
OK
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 73 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit74
– Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ page 68, fig. 44 until the Vehicle Status menu is displayed.
Priority 2 warning messages and information texts: “Information and warning
messages on the screen” will automatically disappear from the screen after a
time and will be stored in the Vehicle status menu.
The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is no
warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not displayed.
If there are several messages, each one is shown for a few seconds.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 68
Note
If there are no warning messages, this menu is not available.
Configuration menu
This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle func-
tions.
Open Configuration menu
– Select the option Configuration from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press button ⇒ page 68, fig. 43 on the wind-
screen wiper lever. or
– Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ page 68, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 68
OK
A
A
Displayed on the screen Function
Multifunction display
data.
This menu is used to establish the data in the
multifunction display menu to be displayed on
the instrument panel ⇒ page 71
Convenience This menu allows you to make the settings for
the convenience functions in the vehicle.
Lights and visibility From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehi-
cle lighting settings.
Time The hours and minutes of the clock and the navi-
gation system can be changed. Choose between
12 and 24-hour format and change to summer
time.
Winter tyres The menu allows the setting of a speed at which
an optical and acoustic warning will be given by
the system. You can use this function, for exam-
ple, if you have fitted winter tyres which are not
suited for the top speed of your vehicle. Please
see the section “Wheels and tyres”.
Settings: Language The display texts and the navigation system texts
can be seen in different languages.
Units This option allows you to select the units for dis-
playing temperature, fuel consumption values
and distances.
Aux. Speed The instrument panel also displays the speed in
another different unit of measurement (mph or
km/h) to that given on the speedometer.
Leon_EN.book Seite 74 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 75
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Note
• For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
• SEAT dealers are able to programme other functions or change the
existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment.
• The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
Convenience menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven-
ience settings.
Open menu Convenience
– Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press
the button ⇒ page 68, fig. 43 on the windscreen wiper
lever.
– Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ page 68, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
– Choose the option Convenience from the main menu and press
the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 68
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Inter Service Consult service messages and reset service inter-
val display here.
Factory settings The manufacturer’s predefined values for the
functions of this menu are restored.
Back
a)
This returns to the main menu
a)
Only if the windscreen wiper lever is used (MFI).
OK
A
A
Displayed on the
screen
Function
Open door One door: Individual unlocking activated.
Auto. locking: the doors are automatically locked
when the vehicle is travelling at more than approx
15 km/h.
Auto unlock: the doors are unlocked when the key
is removed from the ignition.
Elec. window control Opening and closing electric windows: this deter-
mines whether to open or close all the windows
when the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The open
function can also be activated for the driver door
only.
Exterior mirror adjust. If synchronised adjustment is selected, when the
driver side exterior mirror is adjusted, the passen-
ger exterior mirror is also moved.
Factory settings The manufacturer’s predefined values for the func-
tions of this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 75 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit76
Lights and visibility menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting
settings.
Open Lights and visibility Menu
– Select the option Configuration from the main menu: “Main
menu” and press button ⇒ page 68 on the windscreen
wiper lever. or
– Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
⇒ page 68, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
– Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press
button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use ⇒ page 68
Note
For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Displayed on the
screen
Function
Coming Home/
Leaving Home
This option permits the adjustment of the time
during which the headlights remain lit after the
vehicle is locked, and also permits the function to
be connected and disconnected
Indicator conf. The convenience turn signal function can be acti-
vated or deactivated here. With the convenience
mode activated, the turn signal will blink at least
three times when turned on.
Factory settings The manufacturer’s predefined values for the func-
tions of this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
OK
A
A
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 76 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 77
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fig. 48 Instrument panel indicator and warning lamps.
Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only
on certain model versions or are optional extras.
Leon_EN.book Seite 77 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit78
Item Symbol
Meaning of indicator
and warning lamps
Further
information
z
Fuel level / reserve ⇒ page 82
v
Coolant level / coolant temperature ⇒ page 82
Rear fog light switched on ⇒ page 83
Turn signals in operation ⇒ page 83
%0#
Engine fault (petrol engine) ⇒ page 83
D
Glow plug system for diesel engine ⇒ page 83
Main beam switched on ⇒ page 84
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine
particulate filter
⇒ page 84
J
ABS system fault ⇒ page 84
Y
Windscreen washer fluid level ⇒ page 85
F
Alternator fault ⇒ page 85
h
Fasten seat belts! ⇒ page 19
I
Brake pad worn ⇒ page 85
~
Tyre pressure ⇒ page 85
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
10
A
11
A
12
A
13
T
Airbag or belt tensioner system fault or
airbag disabled
⇒ page 28
⇒ page 31
Bulb defective ⇒ page 87
H
Handbrake applied,
low brake fluid level or
fault in brake system
⇒ page 86
E
Red:
Engine oil pressure
⇒ page 87
Yellow:
If flashing: engine oil sensor faulty
If it remains lit: insufficient engine oil
Cruise control system switched on ⇒ page 87
o
Door open indicator ⇒ page 88
l
If it stays lit: TCS disabled
⇒ page 88
⇒ page 89
⇒ page 161
Electromechanical steering ⇒ page 88
Fault in the emission control system ⇒ page 88
If flashing: Electronic Stability Pro-
gramme (ESP) or the TCS is working
If it remains lit: ESP or TCS faulty
⇒ page 88
⇒ page 89
⇒ page 161
K
Selector lever lock (automatic gearbox) ⇒ page 89
Item Symbol
Meaning of indicator
and warning lamps
Further
information
A
14
A
15
A
16
A
17
A
18
A
19
A
20
A
21
A
22
A
23
A
24
Leon_EN.book Seite 78 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 79
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
WARNING
• Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in
serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a
warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to
prevent danger to third parties.
• The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the
bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must
switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or
other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings ⇒ page 221.
Note
• The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information messages in the display.
• In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information
message will also appear on the screen.
Leon_EN.book Seite 79 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit80
Overview of indicator and warning lamps (vehicles with LPG)
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions
and possible faults.
Fig. 49 Instrument panel indicator and warning lamps in vehicles with LPG.
WARNING
• Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in
serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a
warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to
prevent danger to third parties.
• The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the
bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must
switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or
other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings ⇒ page 221.
Note
• The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information messages in the display.
• In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information
message will also appear on the screen.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning
symbols (priority 2)
Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain
professional assistance if necessary.
Item Symbol
Meaning of indicator
and warning lamps
Further
information
Red: Coolant level / temperature ⇒ page 82
Blue: Cold engine warning ⇒ page 166
h
LPG system connected ⇒ page 166
A
1
A
2
A
3
Leon_EN.book Seite 80 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 81
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue
until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
message.
Examples of priority 1 warning messages (red)
• Brake system symbol H with the warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID
SERVICE MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL.
• Coolant symbol v with the warning message STOP SEE COOLANT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
• Engine oil pressure symbol E with the warning message STOP ENGINE
OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Warning reports, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
by one audible warning. Check the corresponding function as soon as
possible although the vehicle may be used without risk.
If several priority 2 warning messages are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After
a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown
as a reminder at the side of the display.
Priority 2 warning messages will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
messages have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning messages (yellow):
10)
• Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.
• Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Top up the washer fluid level.
Information messages displayed on the screen*
10)
Depending on the model version.
Message
a)
Description
SERVICE The service interval has ended. Take the vehicle to an
authorised service.
IMMOBILISER Immobiliser system active. The vehicle will not start. Take
the vehicle to an authorised service.
ERROR Instrument panel faulty. Take the vehicle to an authorised
service.
CLEAN AIR
FILTER
Warning: The air filter must be cleaned
NO KEY Warning: Correct key cannot be found in the vehicle.
KEY BATTERY Warning: Key battery low. Change the battery.
CLUTCH Warning: Press the clutch to start. In vehicles with manual
gearbox and Start/Stop system.
--> P/N Warning: Place the selector level in P/N to start. Only in
vehicles with automatic gearbox.
--> P Warning: Place the selector lever in position P to stop the
engine.
STARTING Warning: The engine starts automatically. Start-Stop sys-
tem activated.
START
MANUALLY
Warning: The engine must be started manually. Start-Stop
system activated.
ERROR START
STOP
Warning: Start-Stop system error.
START
STOP
IMPOSSIBLE
Warning: Although the Start-Stop system is switched on,
the engine cannot be stopped automatically. Not all the
necessary conditions are met
Leon_EN.book Seite 81 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit82
Fuel level / reserve z
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank is under
the reserve level.
It lights up when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. You will also hear a
warning signal. It reminds you to fuel up the fuel tank as soon as possible
⇒ page 214.
The instrument panel displays the following message
11)
: PLEASE REFUEL!.
Coolant level* / temperature v
The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too
high or if the coolant level is too low.
There is a fault if:
• The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.
• The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, and
three acoustic warning signals ⇒ are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature
is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
The instrument panel displays the following message
12)
: CHECK COOLANT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL ⇒ page 228.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle,
switch the engine off and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction
of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-
sary ⇒ page 254.
If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop
the vehicle and switch the engine off. Contact an Authorised Service Centre
or a specialised workshop.
Coolant level too low
The instrument panel displays the following message
13)
: STOP CHECK
COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
START STOP
ACTIVE
Warning: Start-Stop system activated. Vehicle in Stop
mode.
SWITCH
OFF
Warning: Start-Stop system activated. Switch off the igni-
tion when you leave the vehicle.
STOP
TRANSMISSION
TOO HOT
Warning: Stop the engine. Gearbox overheated.
BRAKE Warning: To start the engine, press the brake pedal. Only
in vehicles with automatic gearbox.
COASTING
FUNCTION
Warning: Coasting mode active. Transmission engaged.
Only in vehicles with automatic gearbox.
CHECK
SAFELOCK
Notification of central locking function activated.
a)
These messages may vary according the version of the vehicle model.
11)
Depending on the model version.
12)
Depending on the model version.
13)
Depending on the model version.
Leon_EN.book Seite 82 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 83
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity ⇒ .
WARNING
• If your vehicle is immobilised for technical reasons, move it to a safe
distance from traffic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights on and
place the warning triangle.
• Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no
longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
• The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any
work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool
down. Always note the corresponding warnings ⇒ page 221.
Rear fog light
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . For
further information see ⇒ page 117.
Turn signals
The indicator lamp flashes when the turn signals are in oper-
ation.
Depending on which turn signal is operating, either the left or right turn
signal lamp flashes. Both indicator lamps will flash at the same time when
the hazard warning lights are switched on.
If any of both turn signals fails, the indicator lamp will start flashing twice
faster than normal.
For further information on the turn signals, please see ⇒ page 124.
Engine management* %0#
This warning lamp monitors the engine management system
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp %0# (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out
once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are
driving, this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance.
Glow plug system / Engine fault D
The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are
preheating. It flashes if there is an engine fault.
Warning lamp D is lit
The warning lamp
D lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When the
warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight away.
Warning lamp
D flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving,
the glow plug lamp will flash
D. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Leon_EN.book Seite 83 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit84
Main beam headlights
The indicator lamp lights up when the main beams are on.
The warning lamp is switched on once main beams are on or once the
headlight flasher is operating.
For further information see ⇒ page 124.
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter
If the warning lamp lights up you should help the filter clean itself by
driving in the appropriate manner.
To do this, drive about 15 minutes in fourth or fifth gear (automatic gearbox:
S gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with the engine running at approxi-
mately 2000 rpm. In this way, the pollen build up in the filter is burned. When
cleaning is successful, the indicator turns off.
If the warning lamp
does not turn off, or the three lamps turn on (partic-
ulate filter
, emission control system fault and glow plugs D), take
the vehicle to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.
WARNING
• Always drive according to the road weather conditions, the terrain and
traffic. Driving recommendations should never lead to illegal manoeuvres
in surrounding traffic.
• The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera-
tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under-
neath the vehicle. Otherwise there is a risk of fire.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)* J
A warning lamp monitors the ABS.
The indicator lamp J should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
• The warning lamp J does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
• The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds
• The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way, without the ABS function.
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible. For further
information on the ABS go to ⇒ page 185.
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp
J lights up together with the brake warning lamp
H, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
in the brake system ⇒ .
WARNING
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
⇒ page 221, “Working in the engine compartment”.
• If the brake warning lamp H should light up together with the ABS
warning lamp
J, stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir ⇒ page 233, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has
dropped below the “MIN” mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident.
Obtain technical assistance.
• If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have
been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear
Leon_EN.book Seite 84 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 85
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break
away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
Washer fluid Y
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
⇒ page 230
The following message is shown on the instrument panel display*
14)
: REFILL
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.
Alternator F
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp F lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go
out when the engine has started running.
If the warning lamp
F lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer
charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest specialised
workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary
because this will drain the battery.
Worn brake pads I
If the I symbol lights up, have the front brake pads (and, for safety reasons,
the rear pads as well) inspected by a specialised workshop.
Tyre pressure~
The tyre pressure control system controls the tyre speed and
the frequency spectrum of each tyre.
The tyre warning lamp
15)
compares wheel revolutions and with this informa-
tion, the diameter of each wheel using the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a
wheel changes, the tyre warning lamp ~ lights up. The wheel diameter
changes when:
• Tyre pressure is insufficient.
14)
Depending on the model version.
WARNING (continued)
15)
Depending on the model version
Fig. 50 Centre console:
tyre monitor system
button
Leon_EN.book Seite 85 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit86
• The tyre structure is damaged.
• The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.
• The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving with
a trailer or on extreme slopes).
• The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
• The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
• The wheel on one axle is changed.
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to tyre pressure or after changing one or more
wheels, the button ⇒ page 85, fig. 50 must be kept pressed while the igni-
tion is on until an acoustic signal is heard and the warning lamp goes out.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or
heavy load), the tyre pressure must be increased to the recommended value
for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor
system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure warning lamp
~ lights up
If the tyre pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by
the driver, the tyre control warning lamp lights up ⇒ .
The tyre pressure warning lamp
~ flashes
If the tyre pressure warning lamp flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the
nearest specialised workshop.
WARNING
• When the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up, reduce speed immedi-
ately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible,
and check the tyre pressure and status.
• The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures. For this
reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked.
• Under certain circumstances (for example, when driving in a sportslike
manner, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre warning lamp may
light up or function incorrectly.
Note
If the battery is disconnected, the yellow warning lamp ~ lights up after
turning the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.
Brake system* / handbrake H
The warning lamp lights up if the handbrake is applied, if the
brake fluid level falls too low or if there is a fault in the brake
system.
This warning lamp H lights up if
• the handbrake is on.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following message
will appear on the instrument panel display
16)
: HANDBRAKE ON. You will also
hear an acoustic warning signal.
• the brake fluid level is too low ⇒ page 233.
The instrument panel displays the following message
16)
: STOP BRAKE FLUID
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
• there is a fault in the brake system.
The instrument panel displays the following message
16)
: BRAKE SYSTEM
FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
16)
Depending on the model version.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 86 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 87
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
This warning lamp can light up together with the ABS system warning lamp.
WARNING
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
⇒ page 221.
• If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when
driving, the brake fluid level ⇒ page 233, “Brake fluid” in the reservoir is
too low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-
nical assistance.
• If the brake warning lamp H lights up together with the ABS warning
lamp
J, the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could
cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the
rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance.
Bulb defect
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle’s exte-
rior lighting is defective.
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle’s exterior lighting
(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.
The instrument panel displays the following message
17)
: LEFT FULL BEAM
FAULTY.
Engine oil pressure E
If this warning lamp is red it indicates that the engine oil pres-
sure is too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible
warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more
oil ⇒ page 224.
The instrument panel displays the following message
18)
: STOP ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The
engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.
Checking the oil level
E
If the warning lamp is yellow E the engine oil level should be checked as
soon as possible. Top up the oil ⇒ page 226 at the next opportunity.
Oil level sensor faulty*
E
If the E yellow warning lamp flashes, take the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop to have the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is advisable to check
the oil level every time you refuel.
Cruise control system*
The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system
is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched on.
For further information on the cruise control system, see ⇒ page 181.
17)
Depending on the model version.
18)
Depending on the model version.
Leon_EN.book Seite 87 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit88
Indicator for open doors or tailgate* o
This warning lamp lights up if one of the doors or the tailgate
is open.
The warning light o should go off when all the doors are closed correctly.
The system also works when the ignition is switched off. It should go off
approx. 15 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
Electromechanical steering*
For vehicles with power steering, the level of steering assistance depends on
the vehicle’s speed and on the steering angle.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.
If the battery is disconnected, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine
running. The warning light only goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.
There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does not
go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. The warning lamp may
appear in two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indi-
cates a minor fault. If it lights red, seek workshop assistance immediately, as
the steering assistance is not working; in this case you should not keep
driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance. The power steering
does not work if the battery is flat or if the engine is off (for example, for
towing). You should take into account that you will need considerably more
power than normal to steer the vehicle if the power steering is not working
correctly or at all.
For those vehicles fitted with ESP* the function “Recommended steering
manoeuvre” is included. See ⇒ page 187.
Emission control system*
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Warning lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the
engine checked.
The instrument panel displays the following message
19)
: EXHAUST GAS SEE
WORKSHOP.
Warning lamp
is lit:
If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the
exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.
The following message is shown in the instrument panel display: EXHAUST
GAS SEE WORKSHOP.
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)* / l
There are two warning lamps for the electronic stability
programme. The
lamp provides information concerning
the function and the
l provides information on the discon-
nection status
Both lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go
out after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.
19)
Depending on the model version.
Leon_EN.book Seite 88 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit 89
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
This programme includes the ABS, EDL and TCS. This also includes the brake
assist system (BAS), automatic cleaning of the brake discs and the trailer
stability programme (TSP).
The warning lamp
has the following functions:
• It flashes when the TCS/ESP is activated when driving.
• It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
• It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP
operates in conjunction with the ABS.
If the ESP warning lamp
lights up and stays on after the engine is started,
this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP.
In this case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then
on again. If the warning lamp goes out, this means the system is fully func-
tional.
The
l lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the
system:
• It stays lit when the TCS is disconnected after pressing the l switch.
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp J. Take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible. For further informa-
tion on the EDL see ⇒ page 188, “Electronic differential lock (EDL)*”.
Traction control system (TCS)* /l
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
There are two warning lamps for the traction control system: and l. Both
lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go out
after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.
The
lamp has the following function:
• It flashes when the TCS is on, and the vehicle is moving.
If the system is deactivated or if it has any fault, the warning lamp will remain
lit. It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-
ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see ⇒ page 185,
“Brakes”
The
l lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the
system:
• It stays lit when the TCS is disconnected after pressing the TCS OFF switch.
By pressing again, TCS function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched
off.
Operating the foot brake K
The brake pedal must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is
necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
positions P or N.
Leon_EN.book Seite 89 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Cockpit90
Electronic immobiliser* “Safe”
This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised key is used.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be
activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition
lock.
The instrument panel displays the following message
20)
: SAFE. The vehicle
cannot be used in that case ⇒ page 163.
The engine can, however, be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
key is used.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle can only be ensured if genuine SEAT keys
are used.
20)
Depending on the model version.
Leon_EN.book Seite 90 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Steering wheel controls 91
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Steering wheel controls
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible
to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, as well as the
automatic gears*, without needing to distract the driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction module:
• Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering
wheel.
• Audio + Telephone version, to control the available audio functions and
the telephone system from the steering wheel.
Both versions may be used to control the Audio system (Radio, Audio CD,
mp3 CD, iPod
21)
/USB
21)
/SD
21)
) and the Radio navigation system, in which
case they also control the Navigation system.
• Version for automatic gearbox* ⇒ page 174.
21)
If fitted in the vehicle.
Leon_EN.book Seite 91 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Steering wheel controls92
Audio system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 51 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 52 Steering wheel
controls (depending on
version of model)
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX
Volume up
Volume up Volume up
Volume down
Volume down Volume down
Search for next station
Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
No specific function
Search for last station
Last track
Hold down: Rewind
No specific function
No specific function
No specific function No specific function
Silence Pause
Silence
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
F
Leon_EN.book Seite 92 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Steering wheel controls 93
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
a)
Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display
Next preset
b)
Next track
b)
No specific function
b)
a)
Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display
Previous preset
b)
Previous track
b)
No specific function
b)
a)
Next preset Change folder No specific function
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
a)
Previous preset Change folder No specific function
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
a)
Change source Change source Change source
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
a)
Depending on the model version
b)
Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
A
G
A
H
A
I
A
J
A
K
A
L
Leon_EN.book Seite 93 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Steering wheel controls94
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 53 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 54 Steering wheel
controls (depending on
version of model)
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX TELEPHONE
Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down
Search for next station
Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
No specific function No specific function
Search for last station
Last track
Hold down: Rewind
No specific function No specific function
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telephone menu on instru-
ment panel
Access telephone menu on
instrument panel
Make call
Accept incoming call
End call
Hold down: reject incoming
call
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
F
Leon_EN.book Seite 94 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Steering wheel controls 95
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Next preset
a)
Next track
a)
No specific function
Movement on telephone menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
Previous preset
a)
Previous track
a)
No specific function
Movement on telephone menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Confirm
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
Return to MULTIFUNCTION DIS-
PLAY menu
a)
Only if the instrument panel is in Audio menu.
A
G
A
H
A
I
A
J
A
K
A
L
Leon_EN.book Seite 95 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Steering wheel controls96
Radio navigation system
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Fig. 55 Controls on the
steering wheel
Fig. 56 Steering wheel
controls (depending on
version of model)
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE
Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down
Search for next station
Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
No specific function No specific function No specific function
Search for last station
Previous track
Hold down: Rewind
No specific function No specific function No specific function
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
Leon_EN.book Seite 96 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Steering wheel controls 97
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
No specific function No specific function No specific function No specific function
Accept incoming call
(press briefly)
Reject incoming call
(press and hold down)
End ongoing call /estab-
lish call (press briefly)
Switch to private mode
(press and hold down)
Redial last number (press
and hold down)
a)
Activation of voice recogni-
tion for mobile telephone
connected to the system (if
the telephone has this func-
tion) / MUTE
Activation of voice recognition
for mobile telephone con-
nected to the system (if the tel-
ephone has this function) /
MUTE
Activation of voice recog-
nition for mobile tele-
phone connected to the
system (if the telephone
has this function) / MUTE
Activation of voice recog-
nition for mobile tele-
phone connected to the
system (if the telephone
has this function) / MUTE
Activation of voice recog-
nition for mobile tele-
phone connected to the
system (if the telephone
has this function) / MUTE
Next preset
b)
Next track
b)
No specific function
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel / No specific func-
tion
Previous preset
b)
Previous track
b)
No specific function
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel / No specific func-
tion
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
No specific function
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
A
E
A
F
A
G
A
H
A
I
Leon_EN.book Seite 97 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Steering wheel controls98
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
No specific function
Change menu on instru-
ment panel
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel / No specific func-
tion
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel / No specific func-
tion
a)
For a more detailed description of how to use this button, please refer to the Radio navigation System User Handbook (SEAT Media System 2.1)
b)
Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
A
J
A
K
A
L
Leon_EN.book Seite 98 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Unlocking and locking
Central locking
Basic functions
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all
doors by just pushing the button.
Description
Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:
• the key, by inserting it into the driver door cylinder and rotating it manu-
ally,
• the central locking button in the vehicle interior ⇒ page 101.
• the remote control, using the buttons on the key ⇒ page 106.
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:
– Safe locking system
– Selective unlocking system*
– Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*
– Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking
– Emergency unlocking system
Unlocking the vehicle*
–Press button ⇒ page 106, fig. 62 on the remote control to unlock all
the doors and tailgate.
Locking the vehicle*
– Press button ⇒ page 106, fig. 62 on the remote control to lock all
doors and the tailgate or turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the
tailgate.
WARNING
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer-
gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
own.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have
fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors
when you are not using the vehicle.
• Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse
of the keys, for example, by children, may result in serious damage and
accident.
− The engine may accidentally be started and be out of control.
− If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be acti-
vated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.
− The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could
make the aid difficult in an emergency situation.
− Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The
steering lock could suddenly engage, and you would not be able to turn the
steering wheel.
Note
• While the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the
remote control. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.
• If the driver door is unlocked with the key shaft, only the driver door is
unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. When the ignition is switched
Leon_EN.book Seite 99 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking100
on, the door deadlock function is deactivated (although the doors remain
locked) and the central locking button is activated. See ⇒ page 108.
• If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are faulty, the driver door warning
lamp remains lit for approx. 30 seconds after locking the vehicle.
• For anti-theft security, only the driver door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safe security system
The Safe deadlock makes it more difficult to break into the
vehicle because the door release lever and the central locking
button are not active (depending upon country).
Activating deadlock
–Press once the locking button on the remote control. or
–Turn the key once in the driver door lock to lock. A warning lamp
in the driver door flashes to indicate the Safe deadlock is
working. The warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds at
short intervals and then more slowly.
Deactivating deadlock when the vehicle is locked
– Press the locking button on the remote control twice within
two seconds. The vehicle is locked without activating the dead-
lock. The driver door warning lamp flashes for approx. two
seconds and then goes out. After approx. 30 seconds it starts
flashing again.
The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside if the Safe deadlock
has not been activated. You will have to pull the door release lever once.
When the Safe deadlock is off, the anti-theft alarm* ⇒ page 108 remains
active. The vehicle interior monitoring system* and the anti-tow system are
deactivated*.
WARNING
Nobody should remain in the vehicle if the anti-tow system deadlock mech-
anism has been activated. It is not possible to open the doors from the
inside. Locked doors could make it more difficult to assist vehicle occu-
pants in the event of an accident. People could become trapped inside in an
emergency.
Selective unlocking system*
This system allows unlocking either just the driver door or the
entire vehicle.
Using the remote control, press the unlock button on the remote once. The
Safe system for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the driver door is unlocked
and both the alarm and the warning lamp are also turned off.
Unlocking all doors and the luggage compartment
The unlock button on the remote control must be pressed twice so that all
doors and the luggage compartment can be opened.
Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for the entire
vehicle, to unlock all doors and to use the luggage compartment. The warning
lamp and the alarm (only vehicles fitted with one) are turned off.
Leon_EN.book Seite 100 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehicle
from the outside when it is running (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and the tailgate are automatically locked when vehicle speed
exceeds 15 km/h.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle
moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h, the unlocked door(s) will
be locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the igni-
tion.
Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for
example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever
inside the door.
WARNING
The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the
door would open.
Automatic locking system for involuntary unlocking*
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the unintentional
unlocking of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is unlocked and any of the doors (including the tailgate) are
opened within 30 seconds, it gets re-locked automatically. This function
prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlock button is pressed
by mistake.
Emergency unlocking system
If the airbags are triggered during an accident, the vehicle is unlocked, except
for the luggage compartment. It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside
with the central locking, after turning the ignition off and back on again.
If the doors must be locked from the outside, see “Emergency locking of the
doors”
Central locking button
The central locking button allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle from the inside.
Fig. 57 Detailed view of
the centre console:
central locking button
Leon_EN.book Seite 101 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking102
Locking the vehicle
–Press the button ⇒ .
Unlocking the doors
–Press button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except when the Safe security system is activated.
Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central locking
button:
• For safety reasons it is not possible to open the doors or the tailgate from
the outside (for instance, when stopped at a traffic light).
• The driver door and/or front passenger door cannot be locked if any of the
vehicle doors (except the tailgate) are open. This avoids the user from forget-
ting his key inside the vehicle.
• Repeated operation of the central locking will deactivate the central
locking button for 30 seconds. Once this time has passed, the button if oper-
ative again.
• There is a danger of leaving the key inside the vehicle if the vehicle is
locked by the central locking button when the driver door is closed and any of
the rear doors open. On closing any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks and
the keys remain inside it.
• All doors can be locked separately from inside the vehicle. Do this by
pulling the door release lever once.
WARNING
• If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped
inside it.
• The central locking button is not operative in the following cases:
• When the vehicle is locked from the outside (with the remote control or
the key).
• While the ignition is not activated after unlocking the door lock cylinder
with the key.
Note
• Vehicle locked, button , amber
• Vehicle unlocked, button , red
Unlocking and locking - Manual personalisation
Activating selective unlocking
With the driver door open, turn the key to unlock for approx. 3 s
Deactivating selective unlocking
With the driver door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s
The turn signal lamps flash to confirm activation or deactivation.
Activation of automatic locking
Press the lock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
Deactivation of automatic locking
Press the unlock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
The lock button lamp flashes to confirm activation or deactivation.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 102 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Emergency manual locking
This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of
central locking system failure.
Locking the driver door manually
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for
the left hand side door and anti-clockwise for the right hand side door.
Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Manual (emergency) locking of the remaining doors
Open the door and remove the cap ⇒ fig. 58 printed with a lock image.
This will expose a circular element with a groove in the centre. Insert the key
into the groove and rotate the element clockwise for the right hand side doors
and anticlockwise for the left hand side doors.
Replace the cap and close the door. Once the door has been closed it can no
longer be opened from the outside.
Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked driver door
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left
hand side doors and clockwise for the right hand side doors.
The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior door
handle.
Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors
First the driver door must be unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate the
internal door handle for the required door. If the childproof lock is activated
on the rear doors, when the interior door release lever is operated the door is
unlocked but does not open. The door must be opened from the outside.
Note
Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),
repeat the previous instructions.
Fig. 58 Locking the doors
manually
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 103 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking104
Childproof lock
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being
opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from
opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and
locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated
and deactivated manually, as described below:
Activating the childproof lock
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to acti-
vate the childproof lock.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, clockwise for the left hand side doors, and anti-clock-
wise for the right hand side doors ⇒ fig. 59 ⇒ fig. 60.
Deactivating the childproof lock
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you
want to deactivate.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, clockwise for the right hand side doors, and anti-clock-
wise for the left hand side doors ⇒ fig. 59 ⇒ fig. 60.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the
outside. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated by inserting the
key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.
Fig. 59 Childproof lock
on the left hand side door
Fig. 60 Childproof lock
on the right hand side
door
Leon_EN.book Seite 104 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Keys
Set of keys
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a
remote control and a plastic key tab*
The set of keys belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
• one remote control key ⇒ fig. 61 with folding key bit,
• a key without remote control ,
• a plastic key tab* .
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, go to an Authorised Service Centre with your
vehicle identification number.
WARNING
• An incorrect use of the keys can cause serious injuries.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer-
gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
own.
• An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any
electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The
doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could make the aid
difficult in an emergency situation.
• Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your
vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key with you
when you leave the vehicle.
• Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion.
Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible
to turn the steering wheel.
Caution
There are electronic components in the remote control key. Avoid wetting and
hitting the keys
Fig. 61 Set of keys
A
A
A
B
A
C
Leon_EN.book Seite 105 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking106
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle
from a distance.
Using the button ⇒ fig. 62 (arrow) on the control, the key blade is released.
Unlocking the vehicle ⇒ fig. 62 . The doors and the tailgate are
unlocked.
Locking the vehicle ⇒ fig. 62 .
Unlocking the tailgate. Press button ⇒ fig. 62 until all the turn signals
on the vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking button is pressed,
you have 2 minutes to open the door. Once this time has passed, it will lock
again.
Also, the battery indicator on the key ⇒ fig. 62, will flash.
The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the key. The
receiver is inside the vehicle. The maximum range depends on different
factors. The range is reduced as the batteries start to lose power.
Selective unlocking*
When the button is pressed once the driver door is unlocked, all others
remain locked.
Press the button twice to unlock all doors.
Fig. 62 Assignment of
buttons on the remote
control key
Fig. 63 Range of the
remote control
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
3
A
1
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 106 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
WARNING
• An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer-
gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
own.
• Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result in
serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always take the
key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any
electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The
vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could
complicate the aid in case of emergency.
Note
• The remote control can be programmed by means of pressing the
unlocking button once; as a result, only the driver door will unlock. When the
button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
• The remote control functions only when you are in range ⇒ page 106,
fig. 63 (red area).
• If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, it will lock again auto-
matically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds
after unlocking it. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked
if the unlock button is pressed by mistake.
• If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the
remote control key will have to be re-synchronised ⇒ page 107.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does not flash when the buttons are pushed, the
battery must be replaced.
Caution
The use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote
control. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the
same size and power.
For the sake of the environment
Used batteries must be disposed of at an appropriate waste facility or
through an authorised service, given that their components can affect the
environment.
Synchronising the remote control key
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door with the remote
control, it should be re-synchronised.
–Press the ⇒ page 106, fig. 62 button on the remote control.
– Then close the vehicle using the key bit within one minute.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with the
remote control if the button is repeatedly pressed outside of the effective
range of the radio frequency remote control. The remote control key will have
to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available in your Authorised Service Centres,
where they must be matched to the locking system.
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 107 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking108
Up to eight remote control keys can be used.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are
detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the vehicle is opened using the
key, or if unauthorised access to the vehicle is forced.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically connected on locking the
vehicle. The system is then primed.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried
out when the vehicle is locked:
• Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key
• Opening a door
• Opening the bonnet
• Opening the tailgate
• Switching on the ignition
• Movements in the vehicle interior
• Undue manipulation of the alarm
• Battery handling
The acoustic signals sound and the turn signals flash for approx. 30 seconds.
This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)
If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the
vehicle. This is done as follows:
• Unfold the key by pressing the button shown by the (arrow).
• Use the lock on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm
system remains active, but an alarm is not triggered immediately.
• Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched
on, the electronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates
the anti-theft alarm system. If you do not switch on the ignition within 15
seconds, the alarm is triggered.
How to switch the alarm off
When the vehicle is unlocked via the unlocking button of the remote control
or when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.
Note
• If, after the alarm goes off, another monitored area is accessed (e.g. the
tailgate is opened after a door has been opened), the alarm is triggered
again.
• Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or
not working for any reason.
• The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
nected while the alarm system is active.
Volumetric sensor*
Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft
alarm* which detects unauthorized vehicle entry by means of
ultrasound.
The system consists of 3 sensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.
Leon_EN.book Seite 108 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking 109
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Activation
– It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the
vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button
on the remote control is used.
Deactivation
– Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-
metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-
vated.
WARNING
• The Safe security system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor
is deactivated.
• For those vehicles in which a separation screen is fitted, the alarm will
not function correctly due to interference with the sensor.
Note
• If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-
cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver door. This flashing will be
different to that for an activated alarm.
Leon_EN.book Seite 109 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking110
Tailgate
Unlocking and locking
The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is
activated by using the handle on the tailgate
Opening the tailgate
– Pull on the release lever and lift the tailgate ⇒ fig. 64. The tail-
gate will be automatically open.
Closing the tailgate
– Hold the tailgate by one of the two handles on the interior lining
and close it, pushing slightly.
The system may or may not operate depending on the situation of the vehicle.
If the tailgate is locked then it cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked
then the opening system is operative and the tailgate may be opened.
To lock/unlock, press the button or the button on the remote control
key.
A warning appears on the instrument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-
erly closed.* An acoustic warning signal is also given if the tailgate is opened
while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h.*
Fig. 64 Tailgate: opening
from the outside
Fig. 65 Detail of the
inside of the tailgate:
hand grip
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 110 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking 111
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
WARNING
• Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
• The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are
lit. This may damage the tail lights
• Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the rear
window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
• Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex-
pectedly while driving.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have
fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors
when you are not using the vehicle.
• Closing the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear could
cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in
the path of the tailgate.
• Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may
penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
• If you only open the tailgate, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle
will not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking
does not operate (for example, if the battery is flat)
There is a groove in the luggage compartment allowing access to the
emergency opening mechanism.
Opening the tailgate from inside the luggage compartment
– Insert the key in the groove and unlock the locking system,
turning the key from right to left, as shown by the arrow
⇒ fig. 66.
Fig. 66 Tailgate: emer-
gency open
Leon_EN.book Seite 111 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking112
Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically
The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using
the controls on the driver door.
Opening and closing the windows
– Press the button to open the window.
– Pull button to close the window ⇒ .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
⇒ .
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons on the driver door
Button for window in front left door
Button for window in front right door
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear
doors
Button for window in rear left door
Button for window in rear right door
Safety switch
*
Safety switch on the driver door can be used to disable the electric
window buttons in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of a window.
• Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. An uncontrolled use of the key could start the
engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing
risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This
could make the aid difficult in an emergency situation.
• The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the
ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
• If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric windows.
Make sure that they have been disabled.
Fig. 67 Detail of the
driver door: controls for
the front and rear
windows
p
p
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
3
Leon_EN.book Seite 112 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking 113
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Note
If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-
tion, the window will automatically open again ⇒ page 113. If this happens,
check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it
again.
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
One-touch closing
– Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The
window closes fully.
One-touch opening
– Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.
The window opens fully.
Reset the automatic closing function for the front side windows and
the automatic opening for all windows
– Close all windows.
– Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function
is now ready for operation.
The buttons ⇒ page 112, fig. 67 and have two levels for opening the
window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open and close windows
to the desired position.
One-touch closing does not work when the ignition has been switched off,
even if the key is in the ignition.
The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been
temporarily disconnected, or if the battery is flat. The function then has to be
reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact a specialised workshop.
Roll-back function
The windows have a roll-back function. This reduces the risk
of injuries when the windows are closing.
• If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops
at this point and lowers immediately ⇒ .
• If this happens, check immediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
could not be closed before attempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the
normal automatic function resumes.
• If the window is still obstructed, the window will stop at this point.
• If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to
close it again within 5 seconds.
If you wait longer than 5 - 10 seconds, the window will open fully when you
operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact a specialised workshop.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
A
1
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 113 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking114
• Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only
intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left
alone inside the vehicle.
• The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the
ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of a window.
• Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle
from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
Note
The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the
outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
⇒ page 114.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock
– Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the
locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
– Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds.
All windows which function electrically will be either opened or
closed.
– Press the unlock button to interrupt the function.
– Once the windows are completely closed, the turn signals will
flash.
Sliding/tilting sunroof*
Opening and closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened and closed using the
rotary knob when the ignition is switched on.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 68 Roof lining
description:
sliding/tilting sunroof
rotary knob
Leon_EN.book Seite 114 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking 115
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position ⇒ fig. 68 ⇒ .
Opening the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the
convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
– To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold
the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired
position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Turn the rotary button to position .
Always close the sliding/tilting sunroof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it
unattended ⇒ .
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about 10 minutes after
the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front
passenger door are not opened.
Sun visor
The sun visor is opened together with the sliding/tilting sunroof. If required,
it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
• Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without checking there are no
obstructions, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others.
Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
• Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that
the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric
sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk of accident! The doors can be locked using the
remote control key. This could make the aid difficult in an emergency situ-
ation.
• The sliding/tilting sunroof continues to function until one of the front
doors is opened and the key removed from the ignition.
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
– Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in the locking
position until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
– Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds.
The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
– Release the unlock button to interrupt the function.
– When the sliding/tilting sunroof has closed completely, the turn
signals flash once.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 115 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Unlocking and locking116
Note
The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob remains in the last position selected if
the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and will
have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting sunroof*
The sliding/tilting sunroof has a roll-back function which prevents larger
objects getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does
not prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. The
sliding/tilting sunroof stops and opens again immediately if it is obstructed
when closing.
If the sliding/tilting sunroof has been opened again by the roll-back function,
it can be closed only by pressing the rotary button at the front in position
⇒ fig. 69 until the sliding/tilting sunroof has closed fully. Please note that
the sunroof will now close without the roll-back function.
Operation in the event of a breakdown
In case of a breakdown, the sunroof may be closed manually.
• Remove the plastic cover by inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.
• Remove the lever from the cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far
as possible (pushing against the spring) and close the sliding roof.
• Fit the lever back into position.
Fig. 69 Roof lining
description:
sliding/tilting sunroof
rotary knob
Fig. 70 Emergency
closing handle
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 116 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility 117
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on the side lights
– Turn the light switch ⇒ fig. 71 to position
.
Switching on dipped beam headlights
– Turn the light switch to position
.
Switching off the lights
– Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the fog lights*
– Pull the switch out of position
or to the first stop. The
symbol
in the light switch lights up.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
– Pull the switch out of position
or to the second stop
⇒ . A warning lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
– Pull the light switch from position
to the last stop. A warning
lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
WARNING
Never drive with just the side lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are
not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other
road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped beam headlights if
it is dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
• The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side
lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.
• If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
an acoustic warning will sound while the driver door remains open. This is a
reminder to switch the lights off.
Fig. 71 Detailed view of
the dash panel: lights, fog
lights and rear fog light
switch
Leon_EN.book Seite 117 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility118
• The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
• If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the vehicle will automati-
cally be switched off.
• The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
• Depending on weather conditions (very cold or wet), the front and tail
lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has no influence
on the useful life of the lighting system. The lights will soon demist when they
are switched on.
Automatic lighting*
Activation
– Rotate the switch to the position “Auto”, this indication will light
up.
Deactivation
– Turn the light switch to 0.
Automatic lighting
If automatic headlight control is switched on, dipped beam headlights are
automatically switched on by a photosensor if you drive into a tunnel, for
example.
The rain sensor switches on the dipped beam headlights when the wind-
screen wipers have been operating continuously for a few seconds and it
switches the lights off when the continuous or intermittent wipe is switched
off for some minutes ⇒ page 129.
When the automatic dipped light control is connected but the dipped lights
are off, the warning lamp
!54/ lights up on the light control ⇒ fig. 72. If the
automatic control switches on the dipped lights, the instrument and control
lighting is also switched on.
WARNING
• Even if the automatic headlight control is switched on, the dipped
headlights will not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the dipped beam
must be switched on manually.
Note
• For those vehicles with the automatic headlight system, when the key is
removed from the ignition, the acoustic signal will only sound if the light
control is in the position
or if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming
home function.
• If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog
lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.
• The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Fig. 72 Automatic
lighting
Leon_EN.book Seite 118 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility 119
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
• Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
• To avoid damage to the tail lights, the lights mounted on the tailgate go
off when the tailgate is opened (depending on the country).
Daytime lights*
The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing
the visibility of the vehicle. The daytime running lights are
enabled automatically when the ignition is switched on. It is
automatically switched off when the side lights are turned on.
Daytime running lights (halogen lamps)
22)
The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with halogen lamps.
These include the dipped, side and number plate lights.
The daytime lights are switched on each time the ignition is turned on if the
light setting is in position 0 or
!54/. Depending upon the model, a control
lamp
on the light control switch or the lighting up of the instrument panel
will indicate that the daytime lighting is on.
It is not possible to switch the daytime lights on or off. Please contact a
specialised workshop if you wish to deactivate the lights.
Daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)
The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with bi-xenon lamps.
The lights are built-in separately to the headlights and are switched on each
time the ignition is turned on if the light setting is in position 0 or
!54/.
Automatic control of the dipped light in combination with the daytime
lighting (bi-xenon headlamps)
If the dipped light control and the daytime lighting are activated at the same
time, the dipped lights and the instrument panel lighting will automatically
come on as required (e.g. on entering a tunnel) and the daytime lights will go
off. When the automatic dipped light control switches off the dipped lights
(e.g. on coming out of the tunnel), the daytime lights come back on.
Activating the daytime lights
With the ignition switched off, move the turn signal and main beam lever
upwards and back (right turn signal and headlamp flash).
Switch on the ignition for 3 seconds while holding this position. The daytime
lights are activated and can be switched on.
Deactivating the daytime lights
With the ignition switched off, move the turn signal and main beam lever
upwards and back (left turn signal and headlamp flash) and hold in this posi-
tion.
Switch on the ignition for 3 seconds while holding this position. The daytime
lights are deactivated and cannot be switched on.
Activating daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)
Remove the key from the ignition, move the turn signal lever upwards (right
turn signal) and press it backwards to flash position and hold it in this posi-
tion.
Insert the key and switch the ignition on, holding it in this position for 3
seconds. Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime lights are activated and
can be switched on.
Deactivating daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)
Remove the key from the ignition, move the turn signal lever upwards (left
turn signal) and press it backwards to flash position and hold it in this posi-
tion.
22)
It is only available in some countries or as an optional extra
Leon_EN.book Seite 119 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility120
Insert the key and switch the ignition on, holding it in this position for 3
seconds. Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime lights are deactivated and
cannot be switched on.
Note
Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your
country.
Coming/leaving home function*
The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The
Leaving Home function is controlled with a photosensor.
If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side
and dipped lights, the tail lights and the number plate light will light up to
provide assistance.
Coming home function
The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and
briefly flashing the lights. When the driver door is opened, the Coming Home
lighting comes on. If the driver door is already open when the lights are
flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.
When the last door of the vehicle or the tailgate is closed, the Coming Home
function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.
The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
• On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching off
the lights after all the vehicle doors and the tailgate have been closed.
• If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the tailgate remain
open.
• If the light switch is turned to position /.
• If the ignition is switched on.
Leaving home function
The Leaving Home function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:
• the light control is in position !54/ and
• the photosensor detects “darkness”.
The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
• If the time period for the delay in switching off the headlamps has ended
• If the vehicle is locked again.
• If the light switch is turned to position /.
• If the ignition is switched on.
Note
The setting for the delay in switching off the headlamps in the Coming Home
and Leaving Home function can be changed or the function can be connected
or disconnected in the menu Lights and visibility ⇒ page 76.
• If the ignition key is removed while the lights are on, and the lights are
flashed briefly and the driver door opened, no acoustic signal is heard, as
when the Coming Home function is on, the lights are automatically switched
off after a period of time (except when the light switch is in position
or
.
Leon_EN.book Seite 120 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility 121
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and
switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the
thumb wheel ⇒ fig. 73 .
The instrument lighting (dials and needles), the centre console illumination
and the illumination of the displays are regulated by a photodiode incorpo-
rated in the instrument panel.
The instrument lighting (dials and needles) is switched on when the ignition
is on and the vehicle lights are off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-
matically as the daylight starts to fade. It goes out completely when the
ambient light level is very low. This function is intended to remind the driver
to switch on the dipped beam headlights in good time when light conditions
become poor.
Headlight range control
By using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the head-
light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it is
possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same
time, by using the correct headlight settings, the driver has the best possible
lighting for the road ahead.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
To lower the beam, turn the thumb wheel down from the basic setting 0.
Dynamic headlight range control
Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs (“xenon bulbs”) are equipped with
dynamic headlight range control. This means that the headlights will be
adjusted to suit the load level of the vehicle and “nodding movements” when
pulling off and braking are automatically compensated for.
Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs do not have headlight range control.
Adaptive headlights* (for driving round bends)
When driving around bends, the headlights will light the
most important areas of the road.
Fig. 73 Dash panel: regu-
lation for instrument and
switch illumination and
headlight range control
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
2
Fig. 74 Cornering
lighting using adaptive
headlights
Leon_EN.book Seite 121 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility122
Dynamic cornering lights (AFS)
The dynamic cornering lights only operate if the vehicle is travelling at more
than 10 km/h and the dipped headlights are on. When taking a bend, the
road is illuminated better with directional gas discharge bulbs than with
conventional fixed headlights.
A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp
on the
instrument panel. At the same time, a text message with information or
instructions to perform necessary operations may appear on the instrument
panel display. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault
repaired.
If the warning lamp
lights up on the instrument panel but all the bulbs are
operating correctly ⇒ page 259, there may still be a fault in the dynamic
cornering light system (AFS). Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and
have the fault repaired.
WARNING
If the “automatic dipped beam control” is switched on, the dipped beam
headlights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on
manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the
correct use of lights in all situations. “Automatic headlight control” is
merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the
lights manually using the light switch.
Fog lights with cornering function*
When the turn signal is switched on to turn or on very tight bends, the right
or left fog lamp automatically comes on to function as a cornering light. The
cornering light only operates if the dipped lights are on.
WARNING
If the “automatic dipped beam control” is switched on, the dipped beam
headlights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on
manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the
correct use of lights in all situations. “Automatic headlight control” is
merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the
lights manually using the light switch.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of
other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.
Fig. 75 Dash panel:
switch for hazard warning
lights
Leon_EN.book Seite 122 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility 123
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights ⇒ .
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear, and for an automatic
move the selector lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users
to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for example
when:
• reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,
• there is an emergency
• your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,
• you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. That is that the two turn signal turn signal lamps
and the
turn signal lamp in the switch
will flash at the same time. The hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle is braked suddenly and continuously at a speed of more than 80
km/h, the brake light flashes several times per second to warn vehicles
driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come
on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off auto-
matically when the vehicle starts to move again.
WARNING
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always
use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention
of other road users to your stationary vehicle.
• Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt
petrol. This could start a fire!
Note
• The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long
time, even if the ignition is switched off.
• The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the rele-
vant statutory requirements.
Leon_EN.book Seite 123 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility124
Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the
parking lights and the headlight flasher.
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Switching on the turn signals
– Move the lever all the way up ⇒ fig. 76 to indicate right, and
all the way down to indicate left.
Signalling a lane change
– Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur
resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several
times. The corresponding indicator lamp will also flash.
Switching main beam on and off
– If the dipped lights are on, push the lever forward ⇒ fig. 76
to switch on the main beam.
– Push the lever towards the steering wheel ⇒ fig. 76 to switch
off the main beam.
Headlight flashers
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the
flasher.
Switching on parking lights
– Switch the ignition off and remove the key from the lock.
– Move the lever up or down to turn the right or left-hand parking
lights on, respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the
main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
drivers.
Note
• The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning lamp
or flashes in the instrument panel. The warning
lamp
flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is
correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec-
tive, the warning lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs
are damaged, warning lamp
does not light up. Change the bulb.
Fig. 76 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
4
Leon_EN.book Seite 124 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility 125
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
• The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp
then comes on in the instru-
ment panel.
• The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever – even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp
then comes on in the
instrument panel.
• When the parking lights are switched on, the front and rear side lights on
the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only
work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, an
acoustic signal will be emitted while the driver door is open.
• If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This
is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave
the parking light on.
Interior lights
Front interior light
The switch ⇒ fig. 77 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
o
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
ignition. And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior
lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to position .
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to position O ⇒ fig. 77.
Fig. 77 Interior roof trim:
front interior lights
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 125 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility126
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Front reading lights
Switching on the reading light
Press the button to switch on the reading light.
Switching the reading lights off
Press the button to switch off the reading light.
Rear interior and reading lights*
The switch ⇒ fig. 79 is used to select the following positions:
Interior light switched off 0
In switch position ⇒ fig. 79 , the interior and reading lights are switched
off.
Switching on the reading light
Turn the switch to position (left reading light) or to position (right
reading light).
Courtesy light position
o
Turn the control to position . The interior lights are automatically switched
on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition. The
light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior lights are
switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on
Turn the control to position .
Fig. 78 Interior roof trim:
front lights
A
B
A
B
Fig. 79 Interior roof trim:
rear interior lights and
reading lights.
A
C
A
1
A
2
A
4
A
3
A
5
Leon_EN.book Seite 126 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility 127
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of their
mountings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors ⇒ fig. 80
The vanity mirrors in the sun visors have covers. When you open the cover
a light* in the roof turns on.
The light* in the roof lining will go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed
back or the sun visor is pushed back up.
Note
The roof lamp* will turn off about 10 minutes following the removal of the
ignition key. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Windscreen wipers
Windscreen wipers U
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers
and the automatic wash and wipe.
The windscreen wiper lever ⇒ fig. 81 has the following positions:
Fig. 80 Sun visor on the
driver side
A
1
A
2
Fig. 81 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever
Leon_EN.book Seite 127 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility128
Switching off the wipers
– Move the lever to position .
Interval wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
– Move the control to the left or right to set the length of the
intervals. Control to the left: long intervals; control to the right:
short intervals. Four wiper interval stages can be set using switch
.
Slow wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
Continuous wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
Short wipe
– Move the lever down to position to give the windscreen a
short wipe. The wiper will start to move faster if you keep the
lever pressed down for longer than two seconds.
Wash and wipe automatic system
W
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel - Position . The wash
function will start immediately and the wipers will start with a
slight delay. The wash and wiper systems will function at the
same time at speeds of over 120 km/h.
– Release the lever. The wipers will keep running for approximately
four seconds.
Heated windscreen in the wiper blade area*
In some countries and with some versions, there is the possibility of heating
the windscreen in the area of the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-
icing in the zone. The function is switched on by pressing the heated rear
window key
=.
WARNING
• Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and safety levels while
driving.
• In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless
you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system.
The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure
your view of the road.
• Always note the corresponding warnings on ⇒ page 231.
Caution
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers
when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both
the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note
• The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
• In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only
work when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.
• When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the
lever is moved to the 0 position, they move to the rest position.
• The next speed down will automatically be selected if wiper speed
⇒ page 127, fig. 81 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed
will be resumed when the vehicle starts again
A
0
A
1
A
A
A
A
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
2
A
3
Leon_EN.book Seite 128 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility 129
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
• The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once
the “automatic wipe/wash system” has been operated, provided the vehicle
is in transit (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than three seconds
after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the last wipe.
For the “drip” function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and
then on again.
• When the “interval wipe function” is on, the intervals are directly propor-
tional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter the
intervals.
• The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen.
The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the
obstacle and switch the wiper back on again.
• Before removing any objects that may be trapped in the side areas of the
windscreen, always move the wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).
• The heat output of the heated jets is controlled automatically when the
ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen
wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
Fig. 82 Rain sensor*
Fig. 83 Windscreen wiper
lever
Leon_EN.book Seite 129 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility130
Switching on the rain sensor
– Move the windscreen wiper lever into position ⇒ page 129,
fig. 83.
– Move the control to the left or right to set the sensitivity of the
rain sensor. Control to the right: highly sensitive. Control to the
left: less sensitive.
The rain sensor is part of the interval wipe function. You will have to switch
the rain sensor back on if you switch off the ignition. This is done by switching
the wiper interval function off and back on.
Note
• Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause sensor disruption or faults.
Rear window wiper ]
The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper
and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Switching on the interval wipe
– Press the lever forwards to position ⇒ fig. 84. The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
– Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
A
1
A
A
Fig. 84 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever: rear window wiper
A
6
A
6
Leon_EN.book Seite 130 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility 131
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Switching on the automatic windscreen wiper/washer
– Press the lever fully forwards to position ⇒ page 130, fig. 84.
The wash function will start immediately and the wiper will start
with a slight delay. The windscreen wash system will function as
long as you hold the lever in this position.
– Release the lever. The wiper then wipes for approximately 4
seconds, and then in intervals again.
– Release the lever. The washer system stops and the wipers func-
tion.
WARNING
• A worn or dirty wiper blade will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
• Always note the corresponding warnings on ⇒ page 231, “Changing
the front windscreen wiper blades”.
Caution
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass
before using the wiper for the first time. If you switch on the wiper when the
wiper blade is frozen to the glass, this could damage both the wiper blade
and the wiper motor.
Note
• The windscreen wiper will only function when the ignition is switched on
and the tailgate is closed.
• In reverse gear, with the windscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-
screen wiper will make one wipe.
Headlight washer system*
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds – provided the dipped beam headlights or
main beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the
headlights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note
• To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
• To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.
Rear-view mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should
be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.
A
7
Leon_EN.book Seite 131 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility132
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and off
as desired.
Switching off the anti-dazzle function
–Press button ⇒ fig. 85. Indicator lamp goes off.
Switching on the anti-dazzle function
–Press button ⇒ fig. 85. The indicator lamp turns on.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.
The green indicator lamp lights up in the mirror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior mirror will darken auto-
matically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle func-
tion is cancelled if reverse gear is engaged.
Note
• The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects
preventing light from reaching the rear view mirror.
• If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in
the centre console.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob ⇒ fig. 86 to position L (left exterior mirror).
Fig. 85 Automatic anti-
dazzle interior mirror.
A
A
A
B
A
A
Fig. 86 Controls of exte-
rior mirrors
Leon_EN.book Seite 132 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility 133
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn knob to position R (right exterior mirror).
4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle ⇒ .
Heating the exterior mirrors*
– Turn the knob forwards to the central position ⇒ page 132,
fig. 86 so that the heated rear view mirrors warm up and the
heated windscreen* in the wiper blade rest area is activated
⇒ page 128.
– The exterior mirror heating is not activated in temperatures
above approximately 20 °C.
Folding in exterior mirrors*
–Turn the control ⇒ page 132, fig. 86 to position
to fold in the
exterior mirrors. You should always fold in the exterior mirrors if
you are driving through an automatic car wash. This will help
prevent damage.
Folding exterior mirrors with convenience control*
– The exterior mirror will fold back automatically with convenience
closing (with the remote or the key)
– To unfold it again, open the door and switch on the ignition.
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the extended position*
– Turn the knob to another position to fold the exterior mirrors back
out ⇒ .
Synchronised mirror adjustment
1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will
be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
• Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision however the
objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these
mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing
lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
• If possible, use the rear view mirror to estimate distances to vehicles
behind you.
• Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror
and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment
The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer
needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
Note
• If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be
adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
• In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors, the following points should be
observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the
adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be
completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 133 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Lights and visibility134
• The rear view mirrors can be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as
described before.
• The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors is not activated at speeds of
above 40 km/h.
Leon_EN.book Seite 134 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments 135
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Seats and storage compartments
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection
offered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is
equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to
suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat
position is very important for:
• a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
• a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,
• a safe driving ⇒ page 7,
• ensuring that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum protec-
tion ⇒ page 19.
WARNING
• If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they
may sustain critical injuries.
• More people than available seats must never be transported in your
vehicle.
• Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat
belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system ⇒ page 46, “Child safety”.
• The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body
size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and
your passengers with optimum protection.
• Always keep your feet on the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never
rest them on the dash panel, out of the window or on the seat. This is also
applied to passengers. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the
airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect
sitting position.
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect the
minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal
injury. The distance between the driver and the steering wheel or between
the front passenger and the dash panel should always be as great as
possible.
• Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is
stationary. Otherwise, your seat could move unexpectedly while the
vehicle is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore,
injury. In addition, while adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect
sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents.
• Special guidelines apply to installing a child seat on the front
passenger seat. When installing a child seat, please observe the warnings
described in ⇒ page 46, “Child safety”.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 135 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments136
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
– Adjust the head restraint so that the top is at the same level as
the top of your head or as close as possible to the same level as
the top of your head, at least at eye level ⇒ fig. 87 and ⇒ fig. 88.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 137
WARNING
• Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Improperly adjusted head restraints could lead to death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the
passenger’s height.
Fig. 87 Front view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
Fig. 88 Side view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
Leon_EN.book Seite 136 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments 137
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Adjusting height (front seats)
– Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
– To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
– Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
– Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
– To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
– Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in one of its
positions ⇒ page 14.
Angle adjustment (front seats)
– Press the head restraint forward or back to the required position.
Removing the head restraint
– Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.
– Press the button ⇒ fig. 89 (arrow).
– Pull head restraint out of fitting without releasing the button.
Fitting the head restraint
– Insert the head restraint into the guides on the backrest.
– Push head restraint down.
– Adjust the head restraint to suit body size ⇒ page 14 and
⇒ page 13.
WARNING
• Never drive if the head restraints have been removed. Risk of injury.
• Never drive if the head restraints are in an unsuitable position, there is
a risk of serious injury.
• After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly for
height to achieve optimal protection.
• Please observe the safety warnings in ⇒ page 136, “Correct adjust-
ment of head restraints”.
Fig. 89 Adjusting and
removing the head
restraints
Leon_EN.book Seite 137 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments138
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
The control elements in ⇒ fig. 90 are mirrored for the front right-
hand seat.
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
– Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
– Then release the grip and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
Adjusting the seat height*
– Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
Adjusting the backrest angle
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel.
Adjusting the lumbar support*
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel to
adjust the lumbar support.
As you make the adjustments, the curvature of the cushioned area of the
lumbar region becomes more or less acute. In this way, it adapts to the
natural curvature of the spine.
WARNING
• Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in
motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of fatal accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat
only when the vehicle is stationary.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger in case of
a sudden braking or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted
towards the rear. The maximum protection of the seat belt can be achieved
only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver and front
passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. The further the back-
rests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to improper
positioning of the belt web!
• Exercise caution when securing the seat height into forwards/back-
wards position. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted
without due care and attention.
Fig. 90 Front left seat
controls
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
Leon_EN.book Seite 138 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments 139
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Heated seats* A
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-
cally.
Front seat heating for vehicles without Climatronic
– Turn the appropriate thumb wheel ⇒ fig. 91 to switch on the seat
heating. The seat heating is switched off in the 0 position.
Front seat heating for vehicles with Climatronic
– Press button to switch on the seat heating.
– Press once to set seat heating at maximum level (level 3).
– Press twice to set seat heating at medium level (level 2).
– Press three times to set seat heating at minimum level (level 1).
– When the button is pressed four times, the heating goes off and
the LED goes out (level 0).
The seat heating only works when the ignition is switched on. The left thumb
wheel controls the left seat and the right thumb wheel the right seat.
Caution
To avoid damaging the heating elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.
Fig. 91 Thumb wheel for
the front seat heating
Fig. 92 Front seat
heating with Climatronic
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 139 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments140
Rear seats
Fold down the backrest
– Pull the release button on the backrest (sectioned backrest)
forwards in the direction of the arrow
– Fold down the backrest. You might have to remove the rear head
restraints before folding the seat forwards if the front seats have
been moved too far back ⇒ page 137.
Folding up the backrest
– Fold the backrest back and push the backrest firmly into the lock.
The red marking should no longer be visible ⇒ fig. 94.
WARNING
• Please be careful when raising the backrest! Injuries can be caused if
the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.
Fig. 93 Folding the seat
backrests down
Fig. 94 Folding up the
rear backrest
Leon_EN.book Seite 140 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments 141
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Storage compartment
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever ⇒ fig. 95. On opening,
a lamp* lights up, and on closing, it turns off.
If the glove compartment remains open inadvertently, on locking the vehicle
using the remote control or the key, the lamp* turns off. If the vehicle is not
locked using the remote control or the key and the glove compartment
remains open, after little time the lamp* turns off.
WARNING
Always keep the storage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in
motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking or
by an accident.
The centre console with drink holder
The centre console has a drink holder.
Storage compartment under the left hand side front seat*
There is a storage compartment with a cover under the front
left hand side seat.
The locker* ⇒ fig. 96 is opened by pulling on the cover.
There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-
sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if
too much pressure is applied.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.
Fig. 95 Passenger side:
storage compartment
Fig. 96 Storage area
under the front seats
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 141 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments142
WARNING
• The drawers will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.
• Do not drive with the drawer cover open. There is an injury risk for
passengers if the cargo is released in case of sudden braking or an
accident.
Other storage areas
Other storage areas can be found:
• in the centre console,
• in the side trims of the luggage compartment,
The hooks for hanging are found on the pillar between the front and rear side
windows.
WARNING
• Do not store loose objects on the dash panel. These objects could be
flung through the passenger compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g.
while accelerating, braking or cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of
accident.
• Ensure that no objects can fall from the centre console or other storage
areas into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or
accelerator. Risk of accident.
• Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not restrict the driver’s view.
Risk of accident. The coat hooks are intended only for use with light arti-
cles of clothing. Do not leave any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging
articles of clothing. During sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe-
cially those involving airbag deployment, these objects could injure the
vehicle occupants.
Front drink holders
On the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders
⇒ fig. 97.
WARNING
• Never place hot drinks in the drink holder. During normal or sudden
driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be
spilled. Danger of scalding.
• Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could
cause injury in the case of an accident.
Fig. 97 Front drink holde
r
Leon_EN.book Seite 142 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments 143
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
sockets
Ashtray*
Opening and closing the ashtray
– To open the ashtray, lift the cover ⇒ fig. 98.
– To close, push the cover down.
Emptying the ashtray
–Extract the ashtray and empty it.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the
ashtray and cause a fire.
Cigarette lighter*
– Press on the cigarette lighter ⇒ fig. 99 to activate it ⇒ .
– Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.
– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the
glowing coil.
WARNING
• Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start
a fire.
• Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or negligence when using the
cigarette lighter can cause burns, risk of injury.
• The lighter only works when the ignition is turned on or the engine is
running. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children alone inside the
vehicle.
Fig. 98 Ashtray located
in the front drink holder
Fig. 99 The cigarette
lighter is located in the
power socket on the front
of the centre console
Leon_EN.book Seite 143 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments144
Electrical sockets
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt
sockets.
Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt power socket in the
front centre console ⇒ fig. 100 and in the luggage compartment*. The appli-
ances connected to each power point must not exceed a power rating of 120
Watt.
WARNING
The power sockets and the connected accessories will only operate when
the ignition is on or when the engine is running. Improper use of the
sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire.
To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children alone inside the vehicle.
Note
• The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a
battery discharge.
• Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions in
⇒ page 212.
Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)*
– Lift the AUX cover ⇒ fig. 101.
– Insert the plug as far as possible (see Radio manual).
Fig. 100 Power socket,
front centre console
Fig. 101 Auxiliary audio
connection
Leon_EN.book Seite 144 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments 145
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
MEDIA-IN connector*
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire
extinguisher
Warning triangle
The emergency warning triangle can be fitted in the side lining of the luggage
compartment.
Note
• The warning triangle is not part of the vehicle’s standard equipment.
First aid kit and fire extinguisher
The first aid kit* can be housed in a storage box in the left side lining of the
luggage compartment.
Fig. 102 Opening
connector on centre
console
Fig. 103 Connector on
the centre console
Fig. 104 Housing for the
emergency warning
triangle in the luggage
compartment
Leon_EN.book Seite 145 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments146
The fire extinguisher* is attached to the luggage compartment carpet with
Velcro.
Note
• The first aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle’s
standard equipment.
• The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements.
• Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. After it has
expired you should purchase a new one.
• The fire extinguisher must comply with legal requirements.
• Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher
should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher
will inform you of the next date for checking.
• Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instruc-
tions in ⇒ page 212.
Luggage compartment
Storing objects
All luggage must be securely stowed.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles
well at all times:
– Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment
as possible.
– Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps
on the fastening rings.
WARNING
• Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious
injuries.
• Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and
change the way the vehicle handles.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the
passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
• Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit-
able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.
• When you transport heavy objects, always take in account that a
change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.
• Please observe information on safe driving ⇒ page 7, “Safe driving”.
Caution
Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating
element in the rear window and cause damage.
Note
The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered as
this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.
Leon_EN.book Seite 146 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Seats and storage compartments 147
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Rear shelf
Removing the shelf
– Unhook the loops ⇒ fig. 105 from housings
– Extract the cover from its slot, in its rest position and pull
outwards.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the rear shelf, because they will
endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
Caution
• Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted.
• An overloaded boot could mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seated
and it may be bent or damaged.
• If the luggage compartment is overloaded, remove the tray.
Note
• Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment
cover, rear visibility is not reduced.
Roof rack*
Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
• For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT
should be used.
• It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the
rack, taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for
this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door
frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the installa-
tion manual. Not following these instructions may damage the bodywork.
• Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts and
check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts and
check them at regular intervals.
• Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for
each roof rack system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly along
the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the entire roof
(including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should the
total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. See the Technical Data section.
• When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in the
normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an
increased wind resistance must be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
able speed and driving style must be used.
• For those vehicles fitted with a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere
with the load on the roof rack system when opened.
Fig. 105 Rear shelf
A
B
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 147 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning148
Air conditioning
Heating
Operating instructions
– Using the controls ⇒ fig. 106 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the blower speed.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or
. When the function is activated, the display window in the
lower left of the button is lit.
Temperatu re
With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-
ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Heated rear window
=
This function will be switched off automatically approximately 20 minutes
after being switched on. It can also be switched off beforehand by pushing
the button.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the outside air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic ⇒ .
Fig. 106 Heating controls on the dash panel
A
1
A
4
A
5
A
2
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
3
Leon_EN.book Seite 148 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning 149
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the vehicle rather than
the air from outside.
Air distribution
Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
< – Air distribution towards the windscreen. If the windscreen air output is
on and the air recirculation mode is pressed, this remains active. When the
recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution towards the windscreen mode
is selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons, the air
recirculation mode should not be connected.
– Air distribution to the upper body
– Air distribution to footwell
– Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with the knob . The air flow should
always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
• For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa-
tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself
with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including
the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
• In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle
interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off.
Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long
time (risk of accident).
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 158.
A
4
A
5
Leon_EN.book Seite 149 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning150
Climatic*
Control switches
The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works
when the engine is running and the blower is switched on.
– Using the knobs ⇒ fig. 107 and and knob you can set
the temperature, air distribution and blower speed.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,
or . When the function is activated, the display window in
the lower corner of the button is lit.
Temperature selector ⇒ page 151
button – Air conditioning system on/off ⇒ page 151
button – Heated rear window The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. It can also be
switched off beforehand by pushing the button.
Button – Air recirculation mode ⇒ page 152
Air distribution control ⇒ page 151
Blower switch. There are four speed settings for the air flow. The air flow
should always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Fig. 107 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
A
1
A
5
A
6
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
1
A
2 AC
A
3 =
A
4
A
5
A
6
Leon_EN.book Seite 150 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning 151
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 158.
Heating and cooling the interior
Interior heating
– Turn the temperature selector ⇒ fig. 108 clockwise to select
the required temperature.
– Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
– Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration
desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and
footwell areas).
Interior cooling
– Switch on the air conditioner using the button ⇒ page 150,
fig. 107 .
– Turn the temperature selector anti-clockwise until the desired
cooling output is reached.
– Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
Fig. 108 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
A
1
<
AC
Leon_EN.book Seite 151 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning152
– Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the
required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper
body), (to the footwell) and (to the windscreen and to the
footwell).
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when
the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
• The engine is not running.
• The blower is switched off.
• The outside temperature is below +3 °C.
• The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
• Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a special-
ised workshop.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from coming from the outside.
<
Fig. 109 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
Leon_EN.book Seite 152 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning 153
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Air recirculation mode ⇒ page 152, fig. 109 prevents strong odours in
the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing
through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the vehicle rather than
the cold air from outside.
With high outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the vehicle rather
than the ambient air.
If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be
connected.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle
interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can
quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode
switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
Leon_EN.book Seite 153 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning154
2C-Climatronic*
Control switches
The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioner settings for the left and right.
The air conditioner controls the temperature when the engine is
running and the blower is switched on.
– Turn the temperature control knobs ⇒ fig. 110 in order to adjust
the temperature on the left hand side or the right hand side
respectively.
– The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.
When these functions are activated, they are indicated on the
radio display. In addition, all these functions are lit with LEDs.
Press the button again to switch off the function.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior.
Button – defrost function for the windscreen. The air drawn in from
outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen. The air recirculation
mode, if switched on, will be switched off as soon as the defrost function
is switched on. At temperatures over 3 °C, the air conditioning system
will be switched on automatically in order to dehumidify the air. The
button is lit in yellow and the symbol appears on the radio or navigator
display.
button – Upper air distribution
button – Centre air distribution
button – Lower air distribution
Fig. 110 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
A
1 <
A
2
A
3
A
4
Leon_EN.book Seite 154 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning 155
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
button – Manual air recirculation mode
button – Heated rear window The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may
be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
button – Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution
control ⇒ page 156
button - Dual zone synchroniser
button – Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off ⇒ page 157
Blower control ⇒ page 157
button – Switches on the air conditioning system
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 158.
Viewing Climatronic information
Information about the Climatronic system can be displayed
on the radio or radio and navigation screen mounted at
factory.
A
5
A
6 =
A
7 AUTO
A
8 DUAL
A
9 OFF
A
10
A
11 AC
Fig. 111 Navigation
display with information
about the Climatronic
Fig. 112 Radio display
with information about
Climatronic
Leon_EN.book Seite 155 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning156
The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has
been activated.
In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory
briefly display the current settings of the Climatronic if any are modified.
The symbols used on the radio or radio and navigation displays are the same
as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution
are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is
attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right
sides of the vehicle interior.
Switching on automatic mode
–Press the button ⇒ page 154, fig. 110. “AUTO High” is
shown on the radio display (high fan speed).
– Press the button again ⇒ page 154, fig. 110. “AUTO Low”
is shown on the radio display (low fan speed).
Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include:
When a temperature of 22 °C (72 °F) is set in automatic mode a comfortable
interior climate is quickly reached. Therefore, we recommend you not to
change this adjustment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences or
particular circumstances. The inside temperature can be set between +18 °C
(64°F) and +26°C (80°F). These are approximate temperatures and the
actual temperature may be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient
conditions.
Climatronic maintains a constant temperature. The temperature of the air
supplied to the interior, the blower speed and the air distribution are regu-
lated automatically. The system also considers the sunlight radiation, so
there is no need for manual readjustment. Therefore, automatic mode almost
always provides the best comfort for the vehicle occupants throughout the
year.
Automatic mode is switched off whenever an adjustment is made using the
buttons for the air distribution, air flow or or the air recirculation button
. The temperature will continue to be regulated within the parameters
manually selected by the user.
Note
There are two automatic modes:
• Automatic mode LO: This calculates the air flow for two people.
• Automatic mode HI: This calculates the air flow for more than two
people.
AUTO
AUTO
<
Leon_EN.book Seite 156 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning 157
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required.
Switching on manual mode
– To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons ⇒ fig. 113 to
or press the air flow control . The selected function is
shown on the radio or navigator display.
Temperature
There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector.
The inside temperature can be set between +18 °C (64 °F) and +26 °C (80 °F).
These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may be
slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
If a temperature below 18 °C (64 °F) is selected, the display switches to LO In
this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature
is not regulated.
If a temperature above 26 °C (80 °F) is selected, the display switches to HI In
this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature
is not regulated.
Blower
The air flow may be adjusted freely using the control . Always have the
blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the
vehicle. Pushing the button
to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons , and . It is also
possible to open and close some of the air vents separately.
Switching the air conditioning on and off
When the button is on (LED lit), the air conditioning system is on.
When the button is off (LED off), the air conditioning system is off.
Fig. 113 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls.
A
1
A
5
A
10
A
10
AC
AC
Leon_EN.book Seite 157 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning158
When the button is off, the air conditioning system is switched off to save
fuel. The temperature continues to self-regulate. The set temperature can
then only be reached if it is higher than the outside temperature.
Driver and passenger temperature control
The button controls the synchronisation of the 2 Climatronic climate
zones.
When the button is on (LED lit), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
personalised, for example: Driver side temperature 22 °C and passenger side
temperature 23 °C.
When the button is off (LED off), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
synchronised, for example: Driver side temperature 22 °C and passenger side
temperature 22 °C.
If the button is off and the passenger side temperature is changed, the
function is automatically activated.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from coming from the outside.
–Press the button ⇒ page 157, fig. 113 to switch air recir-
culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol
appears in the display
.
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
a traffic jam.
With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the vehicle rather than
the air from outside.
With high outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the vehicle rather
than the ambient air.
If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be
connected.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle
interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can
quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode
switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
General notes
Pollution filter
The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and active carbon filter)
serves as a barrier against impurities in the outside air, including dust and
pollen.
For the air conditioner to work with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter
must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Schedule.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas reaching very high
pollution levels, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently than
stated in the Service Schedule.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
AC
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 158 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Air conditioning 159
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when
the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
• The engine is not running.
• The button is disconnected.
• The outside temperature is below +3 °C.
• The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
• Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a special-
ised workshop.
Caution
• If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch it off with the
button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a specialised
workshop.
• Repairs to the air conditioner require specialist knowledge and special
tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop.
Note
• If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa-
tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a puddle
underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need to
suspect a leak.
• Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the
windows from misting over.
• The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted
by slots designed for this purpose. Therefore, do not cover these slots with
items of clothing or other objects.
• The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the
sliding/tilting sunroof* closed. However, if the temperature inside the vehicle
is excessive because of the sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by opening
the windows for a short time.
• Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the
air conditioning system leaves a residue on the evaporator, producing a
permanent unpleasant odour.
• It is advisable to connect the air conditioning at least once a month, to
lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
capacity is detected, an Authorised Service Centre should be consulted to
check the system.
AC
AC
Leon_EN.book Seite 159 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving160
Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver.
– Adjust the driver seat to the correct position.
– Push the lever under the steering column ⇒ fig. 114 down
⇒ .
– Adjust the steering wheel until the correct position is set
⇒ fig. 115.
– Then push the lever up again firmly ⇒ .
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the steering column adjustment function and an incor-
rect seating position can result in serious injury.
• To avoid accidents, the steering column should be adjusted only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Fig. 114 Adjusting the
steering wheel position
Fig. 115 Proper sitting
position for driver
Leon_EN.book Seite 160 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 161
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
• Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at
least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest ⇒ page 160,
fig. 115. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not
protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
• If your physical constitution does not allow you to maintain the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The
Authorised Service Centre will help you to decide if special specific modifi-
cations are necessary.
• If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the
driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make
sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
• When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock positions. Never hold the
steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in
the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases,
if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and
head.
Safety
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)*
ESP helps make driving safer in certain situations.
The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) contains the electronic differential
lock (EDL) and the traction control system (TCS). The ESP function works
together with the ABS. Both warning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS
systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatically when the engine is started.
The ESP is always active, and cannot be switched off. With the ESP switch it is
only possible to switch TCS off.
The TCS can be deactivated when in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.
For example:
• When driving with snow chains,
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 116 Detailed view of
the centre console: ESP
button
Leon_EN.book Seite 161 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving162
• when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
• when the vehicle is stuck, to rock it backwards and forwards.
Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.
WARNING
• The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of
physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet
roads and when towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, as this can cause accidents.
• Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in ⇒ page 185,
“Intelligent technology”.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition key
Ignition switched off, steering lock
In this position ⇒ fig. 117 the ignition and the engine are OFF and the
steering may get locked.
For the Steering lock to operate without the ignition key, turn the steering
wheel until it locks with an audible sound. You should always lock the
steering wheel when you leave your vehicle. This will help prevent theft of the
vehicle ⇒ .
Switching the ignition or the glow plug system on
Turn the ignition key to this position and release it. If the key cannot be turned
or it is difficult to turn from position to position , move the steering
wheel back and forth until it loosens up.
Fig. 117 Ignition key
positions
A
0
A
1
A
0
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 162 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 163
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to
position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
• The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle
comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately
blocked- Risk of accident!
• Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even
for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled
people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the
engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse-
quently resulting in an accident.
• Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical
system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.
Caution
The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position ).
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving
the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
Starting and stopping the engine
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with
its correct code.
– Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal thoroughly and hold it in this position for the starter
to turn the engine on.
– Turn the ignition key to the starting position ⇒ page 162.
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the starter
motor must not run on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may need to slightly press down the
accelerator.
When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
A
2
A
0
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 163 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving164
If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after
10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start,
the fuel pump fuse should be checked ⇒ page 254, “Fuses”.
WARNING
• Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The
exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless
poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also cause death.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
• Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution
• When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
• The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
• Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow
the instructions in ⇒ page 267, “Jump-starting”.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach operating
temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with
its correct code.
– Move the gear lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal thoroughly and hold it in this position for the starter
to turn the engine on.
– Turn the ignition key to the starting position.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ page 162, fig. 117 . The
indicator lamp
D will light for engine pre-heating.
– When the warning lamp turns off, turn the key to position to
start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts, the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If there are problems starting the engine, see the ⇒ page 267.
Glow plug system for the diesel engine
To avoid unnecessary discharging of the battery, do not use any other major
electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp ⇒ page 83 goes out.
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal
(up to one minute) to start the engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is
because the system must eliminate air first.
A
1
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 164 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 165
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
WARNING
• Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The
exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless
poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also cause death.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
• Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution
• When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
• The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
• Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow
the instructions in ⇒ page 267, “Jump-starting”.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching off the engine
–Stop the vehicle.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ page 162, fig. 117 .
After switching the engine off, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
minutes. It is also possible that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant
temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine compart-
ment or due to its prolonged exposure to solar radiation.
WARNING
• Never switch the engine off until the vehicle is completely stationary.
• The brake servo works only when the engine is running. With the
engine switched off, more strength is needed to brake. As normal brake
operation cannot be performed, risk of accidents and serious injury may
exist.
• The steering lock can be immediately blocked once the key is removed
from the ignition. The steering wheel cannot be turned. Risk of accident.
Caution
When the engine has been running under a heavy load for a long period, heat
can accumulate in the engine compartment and cause engine damage. For
this reason, you should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you
switch it off.
A
0
Leon_EN.book Seite 165 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving166
Driving with LPG*
Your SEAT vehicle has a bivalent engine able to run on either LPG or petrol.
The LPG tank ⇒ page 216, “Refuelling with LPG” is in the spare wheel well
⇒ .
It is possible to change from LPG to petrol while the engine is running, even
if the vehicle is moving, by pressing the button located on the centre
console ⇒ fig. 118. The selected operating mode is displayed on the indi-
cator lamp on the instrument panel ⇒ page 80.
Starting the engine
The engine is always started with petrol, even when LPG was being used
when it was switched off.
A blue warning lamp ⇒ page 80 indicating that the engine is cold is visible
on the instrument panel until the engine temperature reaches 30 °C. On
reaching this temperature, the lamp goes out and it is possible to switch to
LGP mode.
Automatic switch from petrol to LPG
When the engine is turned on and the following conditions are met, the
system will automatically switch from petrol mode to LPG mode, the notifica-
tion changed to GAS mode is displayed and the green indicator lamp on the
instrument panel lights up:
• There is enough LPG in the tank.
• The temperature of the vehicle coolant is above 30 °C.
• Engine speed while driving is above 1200 rpm.
Automatic switch from LPG to petrol
When the vehicle is operating in LPG mode and one of these conditions is
met, the system automatically switches to petrol mode, the notification
changed to petrol mode is displayed and the green indicator lamp on the
instrument panel goes out:
• When the engine is started.
• If the LPG tank is empty.
• If there is a fault in the LPG system.
• At very low temperatures, below - 10 °C.
Manual switch from petrol to LPG
Press the button on the centre console ⇒ fig. 118 to change mode. The
notification changed to GAS mode is displayed. When the following condi-
tions are met, the system switches to LPG mode, the green indicator lamp on
the instrument panel lights up and the notification displayed changes to
changed to GAS mode.
• There is enough LPG in the tank.
• The temperature of the vehicle coolant is above 30 °C.
• Engine speed while driving is above 1200 rpm.
Fig. 118 Centre console:
gas system control
switch.
GAS
GAS
Leon_EN.book Seite 166 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 167
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Manual switch from LPG to petrol
Press the button on the centre console ⇒ page 166, fig. 118 to change
mode. The green lamp on the instrument panel goes out and the notification
changed to petrol mode is displayed.
Running on petrol
Run the engine with petrol for short journeys at regular intervals to avoid
problems in the petrol system.
WARNING
LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause severe
burns and other injury.
• Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.
• When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical,
to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Note
• If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside temper-
ature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on LPG.
Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.
• The notification LPG mode not possible may be displayed.
Start-Stop function*
Description and operation
The Start-Stop function stops the engine when the vehicle is
stopped and starts it automatically when required.
– When the vehicle is stopped, put it in neutral and release the
clutch pedal. The engine will stop.
– When the clutch pedal is pressed, the engine starts again.
– The instrument panel screen displays information about the
status of the Start-Stop function ⇒ page 169, fig. 120.
Start-Stop function conditions
• The driver seat belt must be buckled.
• The engine hood must be closed.
• The engine must be at operating temperature
• The steering wheel must be straight.
• The vehicle must be on flat ground.
• The vehicle must not be in reverse.
• A trailer must not be connected.
• The temperature of the passenger compartment must be within the
comfort limits (button ⇒ page 157, fig. 113 should be selected).
• The windscreen de-mist function must be off.
• If not, it requires an increase in airflow ⇒ page 157, fig. 113 for more
than three presses.
• The temperature must not be set to HI or LO.
• The driver door must be closed.
• The diesel particulate filter must not be in regeneration mode, for diesel
engines.
• The battery charge must not be low for the next start.
• The battery temperature must be between -1 °C and 55 °C.
• The parking assistant, Park Assist* must not be activated.
GAS
AC
A
11
A
10
Leon_EN.book Seite 167 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving168
Start-Stop function interruption
In the following situations, the Start-Stop function will be interrupted and the
engine will automatically start:
• The vehicle starts moving.
• The brake pedal is pressed several times in a row.
• The battery has been discharged excessively.
• The Start-Stop System is manually deactivated.
• The windscreen de-mist function is turned on.
• The temperature of the passenger compartment exceeds the comfort
limits (button ⇒ page 157, fig. 113 should be selected).
• If in an increase in airflow ⇒ page 157, fig. 113 is required for more
than three presses.
• Temperature setting HI or LO is selected.
• The engine coolant temperature is insufficient.
• The alternator is faulty, for example the V-belt has ruptured.
• If any of the conditions described in the previous section are not fulfilled.
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to move with the engine off for any reason. You
could lose control of your vehicle. This could cause an accident and serious
injury.
• The brake servo does not work with the engine off. You need more force
to stop the vehicle.
• Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. That is
why it is much more difficult to turn the steering wheel.
• Disconnect the Start-Stop system when driving through water (fording
streams, etc.).
Note
• For vehicles with the Start-Stop function and a manual gearbox, when the
engine is started, the clutch must be pressed.
• When the conditions for the Start-Stop function are not fulfilled, the
instrument panel displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed.
• The vehicle can be restarted by rotating the steering wheel three times,
that is, more than 270°.
Switching the Start-Stop function on and off
Every time the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is
automatically switched on.
AC
A
11
A
10
Fig. 119 The Start-Stop
function button.
Leon_EN.book Seite 168 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 169
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Manually deactivating the Start-Stop function
– Press button ⇒ page 168, fig. 119 located on the centre
console. When the Start-Stop function is deactivated, the push-
button indicator lights.
– If the Start-Stop function is operating then the engine starts
immediately.
Switching the Start-Stop function on manually
– Press button ⇒ page 168, fig. 119 located on the centre
console. The indicator on the button will go out.
Driver messages
When the engine is turned off by the Start-Stop function, this is displayed on
the instrument panel.
Note
There are different versions of the dash panel; the display of indications on
the screen may differ.
A
A
A
A
Fig. 120 Display on the
instrument panel during
Start-Stop function opera-
tion.
Leon_EN.book Seite 169 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving170
Manual gearbox
Driving with a manual gearbox
Engaging the reverse gear
– The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the
clutch down thoroughly.
– Place the gear lever into neutral and push the lever downwards.
– Slide the gear lever to the left, and then into the reverse position
shown on the gear lever.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds
with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.
The reverse lights light up when the reverse gear is selected and the ignition
is on.
WARNING
• When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a
gear is engaged and the clutch released.
• Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-
dent.
Note
• Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure of your
hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
• When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid
unnecessary wear and damage.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the clutch on hills. This causes premature wear
and damage to the clutch.
Fig. 121 Detailed view of
the centre console: gear
shift pattern of a 5-speed
manual gearbox
Fig. 122 Detailed view of
the centre console: gear
shift pattern of a 6-speed
manual gearbox
Leon_EN.book Seite 170 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 171
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic
gearbox*
Selector lever positions
Selector lever positions indicated on the cover
P Parking position (lever locked).
R Reverse position.
N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral
position for manual gearboxes).
D Drive position (economic driving programme).
S Sports driving position.
+/- Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of
a manual gearbox).
Driving programmes
The automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox has three
programmes.
Selecting the economy programme
– This programme selects a higher gear earlier rather than remain
in a lower gear.
– Put the selector lever into position D to drive forwards.
– Put the selector lever into position R to reverse. This position is
shared by all programmes for reversing.
Selecting the sport programme
– Move the lever to position S.
If you select the sport programme, S, the programme is designed for a sports
mode, that is, a programme which changes up at higher engine speeds to use
Fig. 123 Centre console:
Selector lever for auto-
matic gearbox / DSG auto-
matic gearbox
Fig. 124 Programme
selection
Leon_EN.book Seite 171 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving172
the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on
the motorway or in the city.
Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)
This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.
This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the
steering wheel controls when this option is fitted ⇒ page 174.
Selector lever locking
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged
inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.
Releasing the selector lever lock
–Start the vehicle.
– Press and release the brake pedal, at the same time press the
button on the selector lever.
The lock is only activated when the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less
than 5 km/h. At higher speeds, the lock is automatically released in position
N.
For rapid changes of position (e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the
lever remains in the position N more than one second then it is locked. With
the automatic lock, the lever is prevented passing from P and N to any other
gear without first pressing the brake pedal.
The selector lever must be put in the position P in order to remove the key.
Driving with an automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic
gearbox*
The drive and reverse gears are automatically engaged.
Fig. 125 Deactivating the
lock
Fig. 126 Driving
Leon_EN.book Seite 172 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 173
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Driving
– Press and hold the foot brake.
– Press the button on the selector lever knob (on the left)
⇒ page 172, fig. 126.
– Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).
– Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to
engage, a light jerk will be felt.
– Release the brake and accelerate.
Short stop
– Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for
example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be
put into the positions P or N for this.
– Do not press the accelerator.
Parking the vehicle
– Press the brake pedal and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to
the position P and release the button.
Driving slowly
– Move the selector lever to position D and press to the right to put
the lever into tiptronic mode.
– Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.
Hill stop
– Hold the vehicle, in all cases, using the brake pedal to prevent
rolling back.
– Do not try to slow the vehicle using another forward gear (engine
braking).
Descending gradients
– With the gear engaged, release the brake and accelerate.
The steeper the gradient the lower the gear must be for effective engine
braking. For example, if 3rd gear is used on a very steep gradient, the engine
braking is insufficient and the vehicle accelerates. So that the engine speed
does not become excessive, the gearbox changes to the next highest gear.
Depress the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the tiptronic gate to
return to 3rd gear.
WARNING
• The driver should never leave the vehicle while the engine is running or
with any gear selected. If for any reason you must leave the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the handbrake and move the selector lever to posi-
tion P.
• When the engine is running and the positions D, S or R are selected, it
is necessary to hold the vehicle with the brake pedal because the vehicle
will creep at a low speed.
• Never accelerate while changing the position of the gear lever (risk of
an accident).
• The gear lever must never be moved into the positions R or P while
moving (risk of an accident).
• Before descending a steep gradient, reduce speed and use the tiptronic
programme to select a lower gear.
Leon_EN.book Seite 173 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving174
• If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake
to avoid rolling back.
• The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even
lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a
reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in
braking distances.
• Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever
in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the
use of the tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed
reduced.
Caution
• Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,
even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.
Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.
• If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in
position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be
lubricated.
Changing gear in tiptronic mode*
The tiptronic system allows the driver to select gears manu-
ally
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 127 Changing gear
with tiptronic
Fig. 128 Steering wheel
with levers for automatic
gearbox
Leon_EN.book Seite 174 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 175
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
General information about driving in tiptronic mode
Changing gear with the selector lever
–Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter
the tiptronic gate ⇒ page 174, fig. 127.
– Press the gear lever forwards ⇒ page 174, fig. 127 to select
a higher gear.
– Press the gear lever back ⇒ page 174, fig. 127 to select a
lower gear.
Changing gear with the steering wheel levers
– Press the right paddle lever (+OFF) towards the steering
wheel to change up ⇒ page 174, fig. 128.
– Press the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change
down ⇒ page 174, fig. 128.
Using the paddle levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driving
mode regardless of the pre-selected driving mode.
General information about driving in tiptronic mode
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox goes
into a higher gear a little before the engine reaches its maximum permitted
revolutions.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox
will only change down when the engine cannot go over its maximum
permitted revolutions.
If tiptronic is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic
gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox is in third gear and selector lever position
D, tiptronic mode will then also be in third gear.
Changing gears in the normal or sport programme using the steering wheel
paddle levers
If the paddle levers ⇒ page 174, fig. 128 are used in the normal or sport
programme, the system switches temporarily to tiptronic mode. To exit
tiptronic mode again, press the right paddle lever towards the steering
wheel for approximately one second. You will also leave tiptronic mode if the
paddle levers are not moved for a certain time.
Note
• The gearbox controls on the steering wheel can operate with the selector
lever in any position and with the vehicle in motion.
Kickdown feature
This feature allows maximum acceleration.
If you press the accelerator down thoroughly, the gearbox automatically
changes down, depending on speed and engine speed, into a lower gear to
take full advantage of give the vehicle maximum acceleration.
The gearbox does not change gear until the engine reaches the maximum
determined engine speed for the gear.
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle if you accelerate on slippery road
surfaces. Risk of serious injury.
• Be particularly careful when using the kickdown features on slippery
road surfaces. With a fast acceleration, the vehicle could lose traction and
skid.
• You should use the kickdown feature only when traffic and weather
conditions allow it to be used safely.
A
+
A
–
A
+
A
–
+ OFF
Leon_EN.book Seite 175 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving176
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the
vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up firmly ⇒ fig. 129.
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the lever up slightly and press the release knob in the direc-
tion of the arrow ⇒ fig. 129 and guide the handbrake lever down
fully ⇒ .
Always apply the handbrake as far as it will go in order to prevent you from
driving with the handbrake applied by mistake ⇒ .
The handbrake warning lamp
H lights up when the handbrake is applied
and the ignition switched on. The warning turns off when the handbrake is
released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following
message* will appear on the instrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. You
will also hear an acoustic warning signal.
WARNING
• Never use the handbrake to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The
braking distance is considerably longer, because braking is only applied to
the rear wheels. Risk of accident!
• If it is only partially released, this will cause rear brakes overheating,
which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an acci-
dent. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake pads.
Caution
Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. The 1st gear should
also be selected.
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:
– Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
Fig. 129 Handbrake
between the front seats
Leon_EN.book Seite 176 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 177
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
– Apply the handbrake.
– The 1st gear should also be selected.
– Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn
the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
– Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle
⇒ .
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started
to roll.
• If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they
point towards the kerb.
• If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they
point away from the kerb.
• Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and
engaging 1st gear.
WARNING
• Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle
unattended.
• Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
• Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is
locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and
could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an
emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.
• Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in
motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear lever.
• Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold
inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Hill-start aid*
This function is only included in vehicles with ESP.
This device helps when starting uphill.
These are the basic operation conditions: doors closed, brake pedal pressed
down and vehicle in neutral. The system gets activated on engaging gear.
This system also works when reversing uphill.
After removing your foot from the brake pedal, the braking force is maintained
for a few seconds to prevent the vehicle from moving backward when putting
into gear. This short space of time is enough to start the vehicle with ease.
This system also works when reversing uphill.
WARNING
• If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off the
brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain conditions.
Depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.
• If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake
immediately.
• When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle
from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake pedal down
for a few seconds before starting off.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 177 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving178
Note
Your Authorised Service or a specialised workshop can tell you if your vehicle
is equipped with this system.
Acoustic parking aid system*
General notes
Various systems are available to help you when parking or manoeuvring in
tight spaces, depending on the equipment fitted on your vehicle.
The SEAT Parking System* gives an acoustic warning if there are any obsta-
cles behind your vehicle.
When you are parking, the SEAT Parking System Plus* warns you acoustically
and optically
23)
about obstacles “in front of” and “behind” the vehicle.
Note
To ensure the acoustic parking aid works properly, the sensors must be kept
clean and free of snow and ice.
SEAT Parking System: Description
The Parking System is an acoustic parking aid.
Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle,
you are alerted by acoustic signals. The measuring range of the sensors starts
at approximately:
The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the
obstacle. When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m away from the obstacle, the
warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about four
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected
obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).
The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
You will hear a brief confirmation tone.
WARNING
• The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is
personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
• The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered.
Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not
always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-
dents.
• Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full
use of the rear view mirrors.
23)
Vehicles with a navigation system.
Rear
Side 0.60
Centre 1.60
Leon_EN.book Seite 178 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 179
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Caution
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the vehicle moves closer, so the system will not
give any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences,
chains, thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be
detected by the system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
Note
Please refer to the notes on towing ⇒ page 180.
SEAT Parking System Plus*: Description
The parking system plus is an acoustic and optical parking
aid.
Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect
an obstacle, you are alerted by acoustic and optical signals. The measuring
range of the sensors starts at approximately:
The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the
obstacle. When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m away from the obstacle, the
warning tone will sound continuously. Stop moving immediately!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about four
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected
obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).
Activating/Deactivating
Activating
– Connects the radio navigator.
–Press the switch
on the centre console ⇒ fig. 130 or on the
gear selector gate. You will hear a brief confirmation tone and the
LED on the switch will light up.
Deactivating
– Drive forward faster than 10 km/h, or
–Press the switch
or
– Switch the ignition off.
Segments in the optical display
Some colour segments in front and behind and an acoustic signal enable the
driver to assess the distance with respect to an obstacle. The amber colour
Front
Side 0.90
Centre 1.20
Rear
Side 0.60
Centre 1.60
Fig. 130 Centre console:
Switch for parking aid
Leon_EN.book Seite 179 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving180
segments combined with a discontinuous beep indicate the presence of an
obstacle. As the vehicle gets closer to the obstacle, the colour of the segment
changes to red and the acoustic signal beeps continuously. When the penul-
timate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the
collision zone. Stop moving immediately! ⇒ .
WARNING
• The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is
personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
• The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered.
Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not
always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-
dents.
• Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full
use of the rear view mirrors.
Caution
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the vehicle moves closer, so the system will not
give any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences,
chains, thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be
detected by the system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
Note
• Please refer to the notes on towing ⇒ page 180.
• There is a slight delay in the picture display.
Towing bracket
In towing mode, the rear parking aid sensors are not enabled when you select
reverse gear or press the switch
. This function may not be guaranteed on
towing brackets that are not factory fitted. This results in the following restric-
tions:
SEAT Parking System*
No warning is given.
SEAT Parking System Plus*
There is no rear distance warning. The system will still give a warning when
obstacles are detected while driving forward. The optical display changes to
towing mode.
Fault messages
If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and the LED on the switch * starts
flashing when you switch on the parking aid, a system fault has occurred.
Please refer the problem to an Authorised SEAT dealer or specialised work-
shop.
Note
If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be
indicated by the flashing LED on the switch
the next time you switch on
the parking aid.
Leon_EN.book Seite 180 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 181
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Cruise control*
Description
The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in
the range of 30 km/h to 180 km/h.
Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel-
erator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible
to drive at constant speed.
• Do not use the cruise control system when driving in dense traffic, on
roads with lots of bends or on roads with poor conditions (with ice, slippery
surfaces, loose grit or gravel), as this could cause an accident.
• Always switch the cruise control system off after using it in order to
avoid an involuntary use.
• It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Note
The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when descending down-
hill. The vehicle will accelerate due to its own weight. Use the foot brake to
slow the vehicle.
Switching the cruise control system on and off
Switching on the system
–Push the switch ⇒ fig. 131 to the left to ON.
Switching off the system
– Either push the switch to the right to OFF or turn the ignition
off when the vehicle is stationary.
When the cruise control is on and a speed is programmed, the indicator on
the instrument panel is lit.
24)
When the cruise control is turned off the warning lamp turns off. The cruise
control deactivates completely when the 1st gear is engaged.*
24)
Depending on model version
Fig. 131 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
B
A
B
Leon_EN.book Seite 181 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving182
Setting speed*
–Press the lower part SET/SET of the rocker switch ⇒ fig. 132
once briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set.
When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held
constant.
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or
the brake.
Setting a higher speed
–Press the upper part RES/+ of the rocker switch ⇒ fig. 133 to
increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release
the switch, the new speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
–Press the lower part SET/– of the rocker switch to reduce the
speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long
as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the switch, the
new speed is stored.
Fig. 132 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
A
Fig. 133 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
A
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 182 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving 183
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal, the
system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case,
however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored
speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stored again.
Cruise control is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the brake
pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part of the
rocker switch RES/+ ⇒ page 182, fig. 133 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Switching off the system temporarily*
The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:
• if the brake pedal is depressed,
• if the clutch pedal is depressed,
• if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h,
• when the lever is moved to the position “CANCEL” without reaching
the “OFF” position. Once the “CANCEL” operation is completed, the lever is
released and returns to its initial position.
To resume the cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the
rocker switch RES/+ ⇒ fig. 134 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Turning off the cruise control system*
A
A
Fig. 134 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
A
B
A
A
Fig. 135 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise
control
Leon_EN.book Seite 183 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving184
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The system is completely turned off by moving the control all the way to
the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition
off.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox
To completely disengage the system, the selector lever must be placed in one
of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the
ignition turned off.
A
B
Leon_EN.book Seite 184 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Intelligent technology 185
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Practical Tips
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works
only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has
to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to
make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
•
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so
could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably
when the brake servo is not active.
• If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is being
towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than
normal.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*
The Hydraulic Brake Assist function (HBA) is only included in
vehicles with ESP.
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force.
This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
This is when the brake assist system comes into action. When pressing the
brake pedal rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emergency. It then very
quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated
more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing the braking distance.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle is braked suddenly and continuously at a speed of more than 80
km/h, the brake light flashes several times per second to warn vehicles
driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come
on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off auto-
matically when the vehicle starts to move again.
WARNING
• The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep
your distance to the vehicle in front, and when the road surface is slippery
or wet. The increased accident risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist
system.
Leon_EN.book Seite 185 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Intelligent technology186
• The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and
wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is
essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions.
Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when
driving.
Anti-lock brake system and traction control
M-ABS (ABS and TCS)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking
during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle’s active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.
The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake
pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-
vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed
so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not “pump”.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is
retained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
• The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery
and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is
working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce
speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the
extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
• The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted
⇒ page 237.
• If the running gear or brakes are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS
could be severely limited.
Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating.
Description and operation of the traction control system during acceleration
(TCS)
TCS reduces engine power to help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel
drive vehicles losing traction during acceleration. The system works in the
entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. If a malfunction occurs in the
ABS, the TCS will also be inoperative.
TCS helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The TCS is switched on automatically when the engine is started. If necessary,
it may be turned on or off pushing the button on the centre console.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 186 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Intelligent technology 187
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
When the TCS is off, the warning lamp is lit. The TCS should normally
be left on. Only in exceptional circumstances, when the slipping of the wheels
is required, should it be disconnected, for example
• With compact temporary spare wheel.
• When using the snow chains.
• When driving in deep snow or on soft terrain.
• When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.
The TCS should be switched on again as soon as possible.
WARNING
• It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
• In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
• Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS and TCS.
XDS*
Driveshaft differential
When taking a bend, the driveshaft differential mechanism allows the outer
wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel
that is turning faster (outer wheel) receives less drive torque than the inner
wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque delivered to the
inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the
outer wheel is receiving a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This
causes an overall loss of lateral grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer
or “lengthening” of the trajectory.
By using the ESP sensors and signals, the XDS system is able to detect and
correct this effect.
Through the ESP, the XDS brakes the inner wheel, thereby counteracting the
excess drive torque in this wheel. This means that the driver’s desired trajec-
tory is much more precise,
The XDS system operates in combination with the ESP and is always active,
even when the traction control, TCS, is disconnected.
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)*
General notes
The Electronic Stability Programme increases the vehicle’s
stability on the road.
The Electronic Stability Programme helps reduce the danger of skidding.
The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and
Steering manoeuvre recommendations.
OFF
Leon_EN.book Seite 187 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Intelligent technology188
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)*
ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually.
The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them
with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
maintained (for instance, if the vehicle is starting to skid), then the ESP
compensates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
Steering manoeuvre recommendations
This is a complementary safety function included in the ESP This function aids
the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in
case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend
to destabilise its trajectory to the right or to the left. In this case the ESP
recognizes the situation and helps the driver with a counter steering
manoeuvre from the power steering.
This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in
critical situations.
The vehicle does not steer itself with this function, the driver has full control
of the vehicle at all times.
WARNING
• It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, as this can cause accidents.
Caution
• In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
• Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking
⇒ page 186.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The system will control the revolutions of the drive wheels using the ABS
sensors (in case of an EDL fault the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
⇒ page 84.
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-
ences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
a slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving force to the other
driven wheel via the differential.
Leon_EN.book Seite 188 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Intelligent technology 189
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
To prevent the disc brake of the braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to
function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that
the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
WARNING
• When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow,
press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to
spin. This could impair the vehicle’s stability.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic
situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking
any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the EDL ⇒ page 212.
The traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the
vehicle is accelerating ⇒ page 186.
All-wheel drive*
On all-wheel drive models, the engine power is distributed to
all four wheels
General notes
The all-wheel drive system operates completely automatically. The propul-
sion force is distributed among the four wheels and adapted to the driving
style and the road conditions.
The all-wheel drive is specially designed to complement the superior engine
power. This combination gives the vehicle exceptional handling and perform-
ance capabilities, both on normal roads and in more difficult conditions, such
as snow and ice.
Winter tyres
Thanks to its all-wheel drive, your vehicle will have plenty of traction in winter
conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend
that winter tyres or all-season tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when
winter road conditions are expected, mainly because this will give a better
braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains are mandatory, this also applies to cars with all-
wheel drive.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with all-wheel drive, all four tyres must have the same rolling
circumference ⇒ page 242.
WARNING
• Even with all-wheel drive, you should always adjust your speed to suit
the conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking
any risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Leon_EN.book Seite 189 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Intelligent technology190
• The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres’ grip.
Vehicle behaviour is no different from a vehicle without four-wheel drive.
So do not be tempted to drive too fast on icy or slippery roads just because
the vehicle still has good acceleration in these conditions. Failure to do so
could result in an accident.
• On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to aquaplane
and lose contact with the road if the vehicle is driven too fast. If this should
happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed when aqua-
planing begins to warn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive vehicle. For
this reason and for that mentioned above, always choose a driving speed
suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
Brakes
What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km;
first they must be “run in”. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-
loading the brakes during run-in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and
the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for
instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts
and stops.
Wet roads or road salt
When the speed is over 80 km/h and the windscreen wipers are on, the brake
system moves the pads towards the brake discs for a few seconds. This
occurs - without the driver knowing - at regular intervals and allows a faster
response from the brakes when driving on wet roads.
In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the vehicle or
driving through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or
in winter by ice) on the discs and brake pads. In this case the brakes should
be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the vehicle
is driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt
on the road in winter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads
has to wear off before braking.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for corrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build
up on the brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently or the brakes are not
used very often.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is
advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times at a
moderately high speed ⇒ .
Faults in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that
one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest
specialised workshop and have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and
remember that you will have to apply more pressure on the brake pedal and
allow for longer stopping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.
The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 190 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Intelligent technology 191
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The
brake servo works only when the engine is running.
WARNING
• When applying the brakes to clean off deposits on the pads and discs,
select a clear, dry road. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other
road users. Risk of accident.
• Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is
stopped. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Caution
• Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is
not necessary to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-
ping distances and greater wear.
• Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change to a lower gear (or move the gear lever to a lower gear position if
your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking
and prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,
it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.
Note
• If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle
has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
• If you wish to equip the vehicle with accessories such as a front spoiler or
wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not
obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
Power steering (servotronic*)
Power steering makes it easier to turn the steering wheel
when the engine is running.
Power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the
steering wheel. In cars equipped with servotronic* power steering the degree
of power assistance is regulated electronically according to road speed.
The power steering will keep on working in spite servotronic* device fails. The
degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to different
speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly, this is
most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for instance
when parking), as more effort will be required than usual. The fault should be
corrected by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
Power steering does not work if the engine is off. In this case the steering
wheel requires much more force to turn.
If the steering is held at its turning limit when the vehicle is stationary, this
will place an excessive load on the power steering system. Turning the
steering wheel to its limit places a load on the system, which causes noise. It
will also reduce the idling speed of the engine.
Caution
When the engine is running, do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for
more than 15 seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the power
steering.
Note
• The steering wheel can be turned even if the power steering fails or the
engine is switched off (for instance when being towed). However, more effort
will be required to turn the steering wheel.
• If the system is leaking or malfunctioning, please take the vehicle to a
specialised workshop as soon as possible.
Leon_EN.book Seite 191 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Intelligent technology192
• The power steering system requires a special hydraulic fluid. The
container is located in the engine compartment (front left). The correct fluid
level in the reservoir is important for the power steering to function properly.
The hydraulic fluid level is checked at the Inspection Service.
Leon_EN.book Seite 192 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving and the environment 193
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run in over the first 1500 km.
Up to 1000 kilometres
– Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.
– Do not accelerate hard.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres
– Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption
reduced.
Braking capacity and braking distance
The braking capacity and braking distance are influenced by
driving situations and road conditions.
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under
which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
drive in town traffic, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we
recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by an
Authorised Service Centre more frequently than recommended in the Service
Plan.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in
heavy rainfall or even after washing the vehicle, the effect of the brakes is
lessened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter). In this case the
brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk
of accidents.
• New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction
during the first 400 km. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. This also
applies when the brake pads have to be changed further on.
• If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have
been salted, braking power may be lower than normal.
• On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively used, they will overheat.
Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and
Leon_EN.book Seite 193 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving and the environment194
change down into a lower gear or range (depending on the type of trans-
mission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
• Never let the brakes “drag” by applying light pressure. Continuous
braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will
increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
• Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking
distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.
• If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use,
vapour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the efficiency of
the brakes.
• Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the
brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please
observe the relevant instructions ⇒ page 212, “Technical modifications”.
• If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider-
ably. Contact a specialised workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary
journeys.
Exhaust gas purification system
Catalytic converter*
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter
– Use only unleaded petrol with petrol engines, as lead damages
the catalytic converter.
– Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
– For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil
⇒ page 226, “Topping up engine oil E”.
– Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary
⇒ page 267.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is
moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest specialised workshop. In general, the exhaust gas warning lamp will
light up when any of the described symptoms occur ⇒ page 77. If this
happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the envi-
ronment. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! There is a risk of
fire.
• Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
dry grass or flammable materials under the vehicle.
• Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the
exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust
system. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.
Caution
Never run the fuel tank completely dry because the irregularity of the fuel
supply may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the
exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic
converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a
smell of sulphur from the exhaust gas under some conditions. This depends
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 194 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving and the environment 195
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
on the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be
solved by changing to another brand of fuel.
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
Your vehicle is fitted with a DPF (Diesel particulate filter) if the vehicle data
sticker (back cover of the “Maintenance Programme”) lists the PR code 7GG
or 7MG ⇒ fig. 136.
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the
exhaust gas system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself.
If the driving conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example,
multiple short trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the
indicator
for the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light up. This
does not represent a fault, it is a warning that indicates that the filter has not
been able to regenerate automatically and that you must carry out a cleaning
cycle, as indicated in ⇒ page 84.
WARNING
• The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera-
tures; the vehicle should be parked so that the exhaust pipe does not come
into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Otherwise
there is a risk of fire.
Caution
• Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any
circumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the
diesel producer in accordance with standard EN 590 is authorised and will
not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.
• Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur content may significantly reduce the
working life of the diesel particulate filter. Your Authorised Service Centre will
be able to tell you which countries have diesel with a high sulphur content.
Economical and environmentally friendly
driving
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depend mostly on your driving style. By adopting an economical
driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily
Fig. 136 Vehicle data
sticker on back cover of
the Maintenance
Programme
Leon_EN.book Seite 195 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving and the environment196
reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce
pollution while saving money are listed below.
Drive anticipating the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
tion, you have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,
let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of
brakes and tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are reduced to zero
(disconnection due to inertia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears.
Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible. We
recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon
reaching 2000 rpm. Follow the recommended gear indication that appears on
the instrument panel ⇒ page 62.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at
higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level
crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only
30 - 40seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the
engine.
The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear
and pollutant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up
phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine.
Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you
will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum
reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and
the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera-
ture.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not normalise until having
driven approximately four kilometres. This is why we recommend avoiding
short trips whenever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the
tyre pressure is just one bar too low, fuel consumption can increase by as
much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also
increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by
up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Every kilo of extra weight will put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth
checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-
essary loads are being transported.
A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is
no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120km/h your vehicle will use about
12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind resistance caused by the roof rack
even when it is not in use.
Leon_EN.book Seite 196 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving and the environment 197
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Save electricity
The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need
for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, always
turn off electrical components when you do not need them. Examples of
components that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear
window heating or the seat heaters*.
Note
• If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not recommended to disconnect this
function.
• It is recommended to close the windows when driving at more than 60
km/h
• Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure can
make the plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can burn the clutch plate
lining, causing a serious fault.
• Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or hand
brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will
prevent the clutch plate from being damaged.
• On descents, use the engine brake, changing to the gear that is more suit-
able for the slope. The fuel consumption will be lower and the brakes will not
suffer.
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials
and production of your new Seat.
Design measures for economical recycling
• Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling
• Modular construction to facilitate dismantling
• Increased use of single-grade materials
• Plastic parts and elastomers are rated in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO
11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
• Nearly all materials used can be recycled
• Similar types of plastics grouped together for easy recycling
• Recycled materials used in manufacture
• Reduction of volatile compounds in plastics
• CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioner
Compliance with prohibited materials regulation: cadmium, lead, mercury,
chrome VI.
Manufacturing methods
• Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts
• Solvent-free cavity sealing
• Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit
• Solvent-free adhesives
• No CFCs used in production
• Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building
materials
• Overall water consumption reduced
• Heat recovery systems
• The use of water-soluble paints
Leon_EN.book Seite 197 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Driving and the environment198
Driving abroad
Observations
To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
• For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
available for the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Automobile organisa-
tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded
fuel.
• In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle model is not sold, and
therefore spare parts are not available or the Authorised Services can only
carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparations that you vehicle requires and also about necessary
maintenance and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
lenses. Further information is available at your Authorised Service Centre.
In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the rotation system must previously be
disconnected. To do this, please go to a specialised workshop.
Leon_EN.book Seite 198 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Trailer towing 199
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Trailer towing
Instructions to follow
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ment.
If the vehicle is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already
have the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory require-
ments for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing
bracket see ⇒ page 201.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available in any SEAT dealer.
Trailer weight / drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to
the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly
steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1000m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and there-
fore the vehicle’s climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air
density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every 1000 m of height. The gross combination weight is the actual weight of
the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer. When possible,
operate the trailer with the maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint
of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.
The figures for trailer weights and drawbar loads that are given on the data
plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct
figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures for the
towing bracket, are given in the vehicle documents or in ⇒ Section “Tech-
nical Data”.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them
moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissible pressure shown on the sticker
on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the
standard mirrors. If this is not the case, you should have additional mirrors
fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on hinged extension
brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the rear.
WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
Note
• Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
mend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the
vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.
Leon_EN.book Seite 199 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Trailer towing200
• Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may
be found in the tool box.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage
compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing
injury.
Note
• By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
and it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
this reason, it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in
an unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially
when driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
sign of snaking. Never try to stop the “snaking” by increasing speed.
Always brake in due course. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be
caused by the trailer wheels locking. Select a low gear in due course before
going down a steep downhill. This enables you to use the engine braking to
slow down the vehicle.
Reheating
At very high temperatures and during prolonged slopes, driving in a low gear
and high engine speed, always monitor the coolant temperature gauge
⇒ page 55.
Electronic Stability Programme*
The ESP* system helps to stabilise the trailer in case of skidding or rocking.
Leon_EN.book Seite 200 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Trailer towing 201
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Fig. 137 Attachment
points for towing bracket
Leon_EN.book Seite 201 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Trailer towing202
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the
vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and
including the maximum drawbar load.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
357 mm
569 mm
875 mm
1040 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
• Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre
to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
• The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting
of a separate warning lamp).
• Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and a power socket must be connected to the vehicle’s elec-
trical system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools.
• Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment
points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop.
• If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is serious danger of
accident.
• For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the towing bracket.
Caution
• If the power socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to the
vehicle’s electrical system.
Note
For the sports model (FR, Cupra...), fitting of a trailer bracket is not recom-
mended due to the design of the bumpers.
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
F
A
G
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 202 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 203
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Vehicle maintenance
Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect your vehicle against the harmful effects of the envi-
ronment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer
substances such as insect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road
dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materials
remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High
temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive
effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Products for vehicle maintenance
Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used them up.
WARNING
• Car care products can be toxic. Because of this, they must always be
kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of chil-
dren. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
• Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package
before using vehicle care products. Improper use could cause health prob-
lems or damage the vehicle. The use of certain products may produce
noxious vapours; they should be used in well ventilated areas.
• Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other
volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-
sion.
• Before washing your vehicle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch
the engine off, apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the
ignition.
Caution
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
paintwork or the windows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty
of water.
For the sake of the environment
• When purchasing products for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones
which are not harmful to the environment.
• The waste from car care products should not be disposed of with ordinary
household waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 203 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning204
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car wash tunnel
The vehicle can normally be washed without problem in an
automatic car wash.
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed
without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, the paintwork
wear depends to a large extent on the kind of the car wash tunnel, the
brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative
products.
Before going through a vehicle wash, be sure to take the usual precautions
such as closing the windows and sunroof.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash tunnel operator.
After washing, the brakes could take some time to respond as the brake discs
and pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking
several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of acci-
dent.
Caution
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Washing by hand
Vehicle washing
– First soften the dirt and rinse it off with water.
– Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove
or a brush. Use very light pressure.
– Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean water.
– Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.
– Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last, using a different
sponge or glove.
– Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
– Dry the vehicle surface gently with a chamois leather.
–In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals and their surfaces to
prevent them from freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
seals.
After washing the vehicle
– After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes
by braking several times ⇒ page 193, “Braking capacity and
braking distance”.
WARNING
• Wash your vehicle with the ignition switched off.
• Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when
cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of
injury.
Leon_EN.book Seite 204 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 205
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
• Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
accident.
Caution
• Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork
or glass on your vehicle.
• Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with
a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the
doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment
To protect environment, the vehicle should be washed only in specially
provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the
sewerage system. In some places, washing vehicles outside wash bays is
prohibited.
Note
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
– Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying
distance.
– Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted
bumpers.
– Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
windows ⇒ page 206.
– Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotating jets”) ⇒ .
– After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes
by braking several times ⇒ page 193.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet (“rotating nozzle”). Even at
large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible
damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
accident.
Caution
• Do not use water hotter than 60 °C. This could damage the vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive
materials such as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is
also important for bumpers painted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer
the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.
Vehicle paint maintenance
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your vehicle if water does not form small drops and
run off the paintwork when it is clean.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 205 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning206
Good quality hard wax products are available at your Authorised Service
Centre.
Regular wax applications help to protects the paintwork from environmental
contaminants. ⇒ page 203. It also protects against minor scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the vehicle washing tunnel, it is
advisable to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in
your Authorised Service Centre.
The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain
wax compounds to seal the paint ⇒ page 205, “Vehicle paint maintenance”.
Caution
To prevent damage to the paintwork:
• Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or
on plastic parts.
• Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved
solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products.
Caution
• The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle may
damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.
• Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors
Cleaning windows
– Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol based
glass cleaner.
– Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
Removing snow
– Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mirrors.
Removing ice
–Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. The chamois
leathers used on painted surfaces are not suitable to clean windows because
they are soiled with wax deposits which could smear the windows.
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
it in one direction only without swinging it.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-
cone deposits off.
Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Author-
ised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper
blades to judder. Adding a window cleaner that dissolves wax to the wind-
Leon_EN.book Seite 206 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 207
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
screen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering, but wax deposits
are not removed.
Caution
• Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
• The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements
inside the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades improve visibility.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleaner to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use a
sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn dirt.
Rubber seals maintenance
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The rubber strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and tailgate will remain
pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter.
To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning
product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains from the surface.
Caution
To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
• Never use an abrasive cleaning product on chrome.
• Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Leon_EN.book Seite 207 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning208
Steel wheel rims
– Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances
and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the
tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the
brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 193, “Braking capacity and
braking distance”.
Alloy wheels
Every two weeks
– Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
– Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.
Every three months
– Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. If road
salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be
impaired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheels.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used. If the protective
coating is damaged, e.g. by flying stones, the damaged area should be
repaired immediately.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances
and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the
tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the
brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 193, “Braking capacity and
braking distance”.
Underbody protection
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical
and mechanical damage.
The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you to
check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and
reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend you to go to your Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair
work and additional anti-corrosion work.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,
catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of
the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of fire.
Leon_EN.book Seite 208 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 209
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the vehicle
is frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after winter.
Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide
the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend
having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment
is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.
WARNING
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 221.
• Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the handbrake
firmly and always remove the key from the ignition.
• Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
• Do not clean the vehicle underbody, wheel arches or wheel trims
without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-
edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.
• Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could
start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!
For the sake of the environment
Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed.
The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
engine washing should only be carried out at a specialised workshop or an
adequate petrol station.
Vehicle interior maintenance
Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning
– Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special
solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleaners
containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the
airbag triggered, plastic parts could become detached and cause injuries.
Caution
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 209 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning210
Wooden trim cleaning*
– Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning the radio and climate controls
To clean the radio and/or climate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more
resistant dirt, a neutral soap solution may be used.
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim cleaning
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
with a special interior cleaner or with dry foam and a soft brush.
Leather cleaning*
Normal cleaning
– Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
– More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution
(pure liquid soap; two tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
and a cloth.
– Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the
seams.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Leather maintenance
– The leather should be treated twice a year with a special leather-
care product, available in your Authorised Service Centre.
– Apply these products very sparingly.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the genuine qualities of this
natural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides
employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.
so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the
leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the vehicle is under solar radiation for long periods, the leather should be
protected to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in high-
quality natural leather are normal.
Caution
• Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
products on leather.
• To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a specialised
workshop.
Leon_EN.book Seite 210 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 211
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Seat belt cleaning
A dirty belt may not work properly.
Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.
Seat belt cleaning
– Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.
– Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
– Allow it to dry.
– Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic
belt retractor.
WARNING
• Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can
impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that belts do not come into
contact with corrosive fluids.
• Check the condition of the seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice
that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the
belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialised workshop.
• Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
Caution
After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.
Otherwise, the belt retractors could become damaged.
Leon_EN.book Seite 211 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications212
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and spare parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your vehicle, we recommend you to consult your Authorised
Service Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories
®
and SEAT
Approved Spare Parts
®
. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have
the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and
professionally installed.
Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess
the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved. For
this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts
used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or
are covered by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
driver’s control of the vehicle (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the
European Union’s authorisation symbol).
Any additional electrical components that do not affect the control of the
vehicle itself (e.g. refrigerator box, laptop, ventilator fan, etc.), must bear the
CE mark (European Union manufacturer conformity declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or cup holders, should never
be fitted on the covers, or within the working range, of the airbags. Other-
wise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Technical modifications
Modifications must always be carried out according to our
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the
vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components
are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by the
faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-
nents, and also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.
SEAT Authorised Service Centres cannot be held liable for any damage
caused by modifications and/or work incorrectly performed.
For this reason, we recommend that all work should be performed by an
Authorised Service Centre using Genuine SEAT
®
approved parts and acces-
sories.
Leon_EN.book Seite 212 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 213
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle
can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be
positioned parallel to the roof.
To fold down
Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.
Caution
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Mobile phones and two-way radios
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of
10watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-
ities for retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a specialised
workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
• Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while
driving you could have an accident.
• Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the
airbag units or within the range of the airbags. There is a high danger of
injury if the airbag is triggered.
Note
Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
radio.
Leon_EN.book Seite 213 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels214
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The fuel cap cover opens automatically with the central
locking system. The tank holds approximately 55 litres.
Unscrewing the tank cap
– Lift the lid.
– Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.
Closing the tank cap
– Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a “click”.
– Close the drawer. Make sure you hear it click into place. The tank
cap is secured with an anti-loss attachment
The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right.
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
soon as the tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the
fuel tank flap. Here you will find further information on fuel.
Releasing the fuel tank flap manually
If the central locking system fails, the fuel tank flap can be opened manually
as follows:
• Open the tailgate
• Remove the cover from the right side trim in the luggage compartment.
• Insert a hand and pull the locking device back
• Open the cap and take out the plug.
WARNING
• Fuel is highly flammable and can cause serious burns and other inju-
ries.
− Never smoke or use an open flame when filling the fuel tank of the
vehicle, or a spare fuel canister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
− Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.
− For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel
canister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident
and leak.
• If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister,
please observe the following points:
Fig. 138 Tank flap open
Leon_EN.book Seite 214 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 215
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
− Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec-
trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to
ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the
ground to fill it.
− Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as
possible.
− If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be
in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro-
static charge building up.
− Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel
vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution
• Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
• Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;
this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 215 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels216
LPG system*
Refuelling with LPG
The LPG filler neck is behind the fuel cap, next to the petrol filler neck.
Refuelling with LPG
– Before refuelling, stop the engine and switch off the ignition.
–Open the tank flap.
– Before refuelling, please read the instructions on the pump.
– Unscrew the cap of the gas filler neck .
– Screw the required adapter on the gas filler neck .
– Refuel as indicated in the instructions on the pump.
–Unscrew the adapter .
Fig. 139 Fuel tank open with LPG filler neck and adapter.
Fig. 140 LPG tank in
spare wheel well
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 216 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 217
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
– Screw on the cap of the gas filler neck .
– Close the tank flap.
When the hose is removed from the tank, a small amount of LPG may spill out
⇒ .
The LPG tank ⇒ fig. 140 in the spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres. If
the outside temperatures are very low, it may not be possible to completely
fill the LPG tank.
Pump attachments
There are a variety of types of LPG pump, and the methods of use may vary.
Therefore, let the pump operator fill the tank when refuelling for the first time
or fill from another pump.
Noises when refuelling with LPG
When refuelling with LPG, noises may be heard. These noises are insignifi-
cant.
WARNING
Failure to refuel or handle LPG in the correct way could result in a fire, cause
an explosion or lead to injuries.
• LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause
severe burns and other injury.
• Switch off the engine before refuelling.
• Always disconnect mobile phones and any other radiophony appli-
ances, as electromagnetic waves may produce sparks and cause a fire.
• Do not remain in the vehicle while refuelling. If it is absolutely neces-
sary to enter the vehicle, close the door and touch a metal surface before
touching the attachment again. This will prevent the generation of static
electricity and any possible fires while refuelling.
• Small quantities of LPG may leak out after refuelling. If LPG comes into
contact with skin, there is a risk of freezing.
• Do not smoke and always keep bare flames away from the tank during
refuelling. Failure to do so may lead to an explosion.
A
1
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 217 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels218
Adapter for the liquid petroleum gas (LPG) filler neck
An adapter is required due to the existence of a range of
pumps with different nozzles.
Fig. 141 General table of LPG filler neck adapters.
ACME adapter (adapter for Europe)
Dish Coupling Adapter (adapter for Italy)
Bayonet adapter
EURO adapter (adapter for Spain)
The supply includes the adapter for the country in question, the ACME , the
Dish Coupling , the bayonet or the EURO adapter .
The filler systems and corresponding adapters vary according to country. As
petrol stations abroad do not always have the necessary adapters for your
LPG system, we recommend you purchase the appropriate adapter before
travelling abroad. Check that the adapters are suited to your filling system.
Note
The four most common types of adapter in Europe are the ACME adapter ,
the Dish Coupling adapter , the bayonet adapter and the EURO adapter
. On the whole, we recommend you carry all four adapters in your vehicle,
as some countries use more than one type of filling system. The introduction
of a single system (Euronozzle) throughout Europe is being studied.
LPG fuel
LPG is an alternative vehicle fuel and is a blend of propane and butane.
The success of LPG is due to the strict regulations concerning exhaust gas
emissions. Compared to other fossil fuels, LPG is characterised by its reduced
emissions.
LPG quality and consumption
Quality requirements for LPG are regulated for all Europe in DIN EN 589 and
permit the use of LPG throughout Europe.
A difference is drawn between winter gas and summer gas. Winter gas has a
higher proportion of propane gas. As a result, the driving range of winter gas
may be lower (due to increased consumption) than that of summer gas.
LPG supplier network
The number of LPG pumps is constantly increasing.
Lists of existing LPG pumps may be found on Internet.
LPG safety
A series of collision tests performed on this vehicle while running with LPG
have confirmed its high level of safety.
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
Leon_EN.book Seite 218 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 219
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
The safety of the LPG system guarantees operation without risk. The following
safety measures have been adopted:
• The LPG tank has a solenoid valve which closes automatically when the
engine is switched off (ignition off) or when running on petrol.
• A solenoid type main valve disconnects the supply of gas to the engine
compartment when the engine is switched off or running on petrol.
• A safety valve in the LPG tank with pipes to the outside prevents the gas
from entering the vehicle interior.
• All anchorage points and materials have been designed to ensure the
maximum possible levels of safety.
The condition of the LPG system should be checked regularly to guarantee
safe driving conditions ⇒ . These checks are included in the Maintenance
Programme.
WARNING
• If there is a smell of gas or a suspected leak, stop the vehicle immedi-
ately and switch off the ignition. Open the doors to ventilate the vehicle. Do
not carry on driving! Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have
the fault repaired.
• Immediately extinguish any cigarettes and remove from the vehicle any
objects which might produce a spark or cause a fire, and switch off imme-
diately if gas is smelt or a leak is detected.
• LGP tanks are subject to pressure and must be checked regularly. The
owner of the vehicle must check that these services are performed
correctly.
• When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical,
to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Note
For any fault in the LGP system, please refer to the SEAT web page, which lists
the workshops authorised to repair these faults.
Petrol
Petrol types
The recommended fuel types are listed on a sticker inside the
fuel tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol conforming to standard DIN EN 228 may be used for
vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = “European Standard”).
Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
= “Research Octane Number”, unit for determining the knock resistance of
petrol). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one recom-
mended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
consumption and engine power.
The correct fuel type for your vehicle is given in the technical table for the
engine, in the Technical Data section.
Caution
• Petrol with standard EN 228 may be mixed with small quantities of
ethanol. However, the so-called “bioethanol fuels” available at commercial
establishments with reference E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage
of ethanol, may not be used, as they will damage the fuel system.
• Even one tankful of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
of the catalytic converter.
Leon_EN.book Seite 219 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels220
• High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using
petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the
catalytic converter.
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences the performance, power and life of the
engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol containing addi-
tives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system
clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,
the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN = “European Standard”). It must
have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates the
ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on refuelling ⇒ page 214.
Biodiesel*
Caution
• Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any
circumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel by the
diesel manufacturer in accordance with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628 is
authorised and will not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.
• The diesel engine has been designed to be used exclusively with diesel
fuel conforming to standard EN 590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene, fuel
oil or any other type of fuel. If you accidentally fill up the vehicle with the
wrong type of fuel, do not start the engine. Seek assistance from specialised
personnel. The composition of these fuels may severely damage the fuel
system and the engine.
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter diesel
When using summer diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at tempera-
tures below 0 °C because the fuel thickens due to wax separation. Therefore,
winter diesel fuel is available in some countries during the cold months. It can
be used at temperatures as low as -22 °C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold
has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel
fuels available.
Leon_EN.book Seite 220 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 221
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glow plug system, making it well
equipped for operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains
operational to approx. -24 °C, provided you use winter diesel which is safe to
-15 °C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start
at temperatures of under -24 °C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for
a while.
Caution
Do not mix fuel additives (thinners or similar products) with diesel fuel.
Working in the engine compartment
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the
engine must be carried out cautiously.
Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selector lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
6. Raise the bonnet ⇒ page 223.
You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know
exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work
carried out by a specialised workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
batteries, are being constantly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of
information to the Authorised Service Centres concerning modifications. For
this reason, we recommend you to have service fluids and consumables
replaced by an Authorised Service Centre. Please observe the relevant
instructions ⇒ page 212. The engine compartment of the vehicle is a
hazardous area ⇒ .
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and
refilling fluids, involves a risk of injury and scalding as well as the risk of
accident or fire.
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining
burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the
engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
• Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
• Apply the handbrake and move the gear lever to neutral or selector
lever to position P.
• Keep children away from the vehicle.
• Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
• Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This
is a fire hazard.
• Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the
points where the jump leads are attached ⇒ page 268. The battery could
explode.
Leon_EN.book Seite 221 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels222
• Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could
start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the
key removed from the ignition!
• Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant reservoir when the engine is hot.
If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
• Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick
cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
• Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths
and tools, in the engine compartment.
• If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable
stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A
hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
• If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the
engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the
rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and
from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the
following points:
− Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
− Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get
trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any
work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
clothes.
− Never accelerate with a gear engaged without taking the necessary
precautions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied.
Danger of death.
• If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical compo-
nents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above
warnings:
− Always disconnect the battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when
this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
− Do not smoke.
− Never work near naked flames.
− Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
Caution
When topping up service fluids, make sure not to mistake them. Using the
wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!
For the sake of the environment
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected at a specialised
workshop.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 222 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 223
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the windscreen wipers are in
rest position.
– To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dash panel
⇒ fig. 142 in the direction indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
released by a spring action ⇒ .
– Lift the bonnet using the release lever (arrow) and open the
bonnet.
– Release the bonnet stay and secure it in fixture designed for this
in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment.
• Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet,
then carefully open the bonnet.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 221.
Closing the bonnet
– Raise the bonnet slightly.
– Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.
– At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.
Fig. 142 Detail of foot-
well area on driver side:
lever for unlocking the
bonnet.
Fig. 143 Arrester hook
for bonnet.
Leon_EN.book Seite 223 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels224
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and
let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and
completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
• After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The
bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
• If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is
moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk
of accident.
Engine oil
General notes
The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme
cold.
As the use of good quality oil is necessary for the correct operation and long
service life of the engine, when it becomes necessary to replenish or change
the oil, always use an oil that complies with VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should
appear on the container of the service oil; when the container displays the
specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that the
oil can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change, indicated in the Maintenance
Programme, be performed by an Authorised Service Centre or a specialised
workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine are listed in ⇒ page 225, “Oil
properties”.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on
time/distance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the Maintenance Programme
booklet is QG1, this means that your vehicle has the LongLife service
programmed. If it has the codes QG0 or QG2 the interval service is dependent
on time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife*)
Special oils and processes have been developed which, depending on the
characteristics and individual driving profiles, allow to extend the oil change
service (LongLife service intervals).
Because this oil is essential for extending the service intervals, it must only
be used observing the following indications:
• Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service intervals.
• Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 225 and LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to top up (once)
with oil for fixed service intervals ⇒ page 225 (up to a maximum of 0.5
litres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife service interval” or it has been
disabled (by request), you may use oils for fixed service intervals, which also
appear in ⇒ page 225, “Oil properties”. In this case, your vehicle must be
serviced after a fixed interval of 1 year / 15,000 km (whatever comes first)
⇒ Booklet “Maintenance Programme”.
• In exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 225 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can
put in a small quantity of oil conforming to the specification ACEA A2 or
ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5 l).
Leon_EN.book Seite 224 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 225
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The “Maintenance Programme” states whether your vehicle is fitted with a
diesel particulate filter.
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash formation, may be used in
diesel engines equipped with particulate filter. Using other types of oil will
cause a higher soot concentration and reduce the life of the DPF. Therefore:
• Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
• Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 225 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can
use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01,
VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3 / ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).
Oil properties
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
Checking oil level
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
Engine type Specification
Petrol without flexible service inter-
val
VW 502 00/ VW 504 00
Petrol with flexible service interval
(LongLife)
VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines without Particulate
filter (DPF)
VW 505 01 / VW 506 01 / VW 507 00
Diesel. Engines with particulate filter
(DPF)
With or without flexible service inter-
val (with or without LongLife)
a)
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
VW 507 00
Fig. 144 Engine oil
dipstick
Leon_EN.book Seite 225 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels226
– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature
is reached and stop.
– Wait two minutes.
– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
– Then pull it out once more and check the oil level ⇒ page 225,
fig. 144. Top up with engine oil if necessary.
Oil level in area
–Do not add oil.
Oil level in area
–Oil can be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after the zone
Oil level in area
–Oil must be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after in zone
Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is used,
oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be
higher for the first 5000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be
checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a
journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 221.
Caution
If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised
Service Centre.
Topping up engine oil E
Top up gradually with small quantities of oil.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 221.
– Unscrew cap from oil filler opening ⇒ fig. 145.
– Top-up oil in small amounts, using the correct oil.
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
C
A
A
A
A
Fig. 145 In the engine
compartment: Engine oil
filler cap
Leon_EN.book Seite 226 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 227
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
– To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
– As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment illustration ⇒ page 277.
Engine oil specification ⇒ page 224.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot
engine components when topping up.
Caution
If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a specialised work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the
exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the
service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
The oil change intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings
⇒ page 221, “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment”.
• Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
• Wear eye protection to avoid injuries caused by splashes of oil.
• When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori-
zontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.
• Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
• Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of
the reach of children.
Caution
No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine
damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be
covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
• Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and
specialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil
and filter changed by an Authorised Service Centre.
A
B
A
A
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 227 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels228
• Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
• Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large
enough to hold all the engine oil.
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-
tive.
The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of
our G 12+ additive or an additive with the TT-VW 774 F specification (it has a
purple colour). This mixture provides the necessary freeze protection down to
-25 °C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It
also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.
The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if freeze
protection is not required.
If greater freeze protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
the G 12+ additive can be increased. However, the percentage of coolant
additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the freeze protection.
It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60% additive will give
antifreeze protection to approx. -40 °C.
WARNING
• The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the
coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the
reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.
• The G 12+ additive must be added in sufficient quantities to provide
anti-freeze protection at the coldest ambient temperatures that can be
expected. At extremely cold outside temperatures, the coolant could
freeze, causing the vehicle to breakdown. As the heater would not work
either, there is a risk of freezing to death.
Caution
• Other additives may give considerably inferior corrosion protection. The
resulting corrosion in the cooling system can lead to a loss of coolant,
causing serious damage to the engine.
• The G 12+ additive (purple) can be mixed with the G 12 (red) or G 11 addi-
tive. Never mix G12 (red) with G 11.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 228 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 229
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-
tioning of the engine cooling system.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 221.
Opening the coolant expansion tank
– Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
– To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a
thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap ⇒ .
Checking coolant level
– Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the
coolant level.
– If the level is below the “MIN” mark, top up with coolant.
Topping up coolant
–Only use new coolant liquid.
– Do not fill above the “MAX” mark.
Closing the coolant expansion tank
– Screw the cap on again tightly.
The position of the coolant expansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding
engine compartment illustration ⇒ page 277.
Make sure that the coolant meets the required specifications ⇒ page 228.
Do not use a different type of additive if G 12+ additive is not available. In this
case use only water and bring the coolant concentration back up to the
correct level as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive
⇒ page 228.
Always top up with new coolant.
Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced
out of the cooling system when the engine is hot.
The G 12+ additive (purple) may be mixed with G 12 (red) and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 221.
• When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do
not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is
a burn injury risk.
Fig. 146 In the engine
compartment: Coolant
expansion tank cap
Leon_EN.book Seite 229 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels230
Caution
• When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown.
If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do
so will result in engine damage!
• If a lot of coolant fluid has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down
before putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large
coolant losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a special-
ised workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Other-
wise, there is a risk of engine damage.
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades
Topping up washer fluid Y
The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be
mixed with washer fluid.
The windscreen washer and the headlight washers are supplied with fluid
from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment.
The reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-
mend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.
Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter-
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please
follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 221.
Caution
• Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
• Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per
instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes
in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Fig. 147 In the engine
compartment: Cap of
windscreen washer fluid
reservoir.
Leon_EN.book Seite 230 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 231
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Changing the front windscreen wiper blades
If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you
will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper
blades should be replaced immediately.
Changing wiper blades can be done in both the rest and horizontal
positions. Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
– Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
– Press on the side tabs and release the blade moving it in the
direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 148.
Fitting the wiper blade
– Insert the tab into the slot of the blade ⇒ fig. 148.
– Move the blade towards the arm in the opposite direction of the
arrow ,until it clicks into position ⇒ fig. 148.
– Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,
or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a special-
ised workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
• Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
• The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution
• Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
• Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
• Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This
could cause damage.
• Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service
position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.
Note
• The wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the
bonnet is properly closed.
Fig. 148 Changing the
front wiper blades
A
A
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
1
Leon_EN.book Seite 231 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels232
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
– Lift the wiper arm away from the glass ⇒ fig. 149.
– Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove
the blade ⇒ fig. 149.
Fitting the wiper blade
– With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.
– Place the blade as shown in the ⇒ fig. 150 and slide the adapter
along until it engages.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned
if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
• Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
• The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution
• A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.
• Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the window.
• Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
Fig. 149 Removing rear
window wiper blade
Fig. 150 Fitting the rear
window wiper blade
Leon_EN.book Seite 232 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 233
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service
schedule.
– Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment illustration ⇒ page 277. The brake fluid reservoir has a black
and yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
“MIN” mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the instru-
ment panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low ⇒ page 77.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe
the warnings ⇒ page 221.
Changing the brake fluid
The Maintenance Programme indicates the brake fluid
change intervals.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on page 221 in
section “Safety notes for working in the engine compartment”.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time, it will absorb water from
the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of the
brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which
could impair the braking effect.
It is important that you use only brake fluid compliant with US standard
FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recommend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
Fig. 151 In the engine
compartment: Brake fluid
reservoir cover
Leon_EN.book Seite 233 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels234
• Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and
observe the warnings ⇒ page 221.
• Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe
place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
• Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance
Programme. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake
fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the effi-
ciency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an acci-
dent.
Caution
Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the
paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment
The brake pads and fluid must be collected and disposed of according the
applicable regulations. The SEAT Technical Service network has the necessary
equipment and qualified personnel for collecting and disposing of this waste
material.
Vehicle battery
Warnings on handling the battery
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the
risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical
system:
• Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
particles containing lead.
• Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and
eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the
vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with
clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralise any acid
splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with
plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
ately.
• Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. When handling
cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
WARNING (continued)
Wear eye protection
Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective
gloves and eye protection!
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the bat-
tery is under charge.
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
Leon_EN.book Seite 234 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels 235
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause
injury.
• A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is
under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room
only.
• Keep children away from acid and batteries.
• Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the
engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery
must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch
off the light.
• Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you
disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
• When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system,
disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
• Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery.
Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never
reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
• Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could
result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which
has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0 °C.
• Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
• Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace a
damaged battery immediately.
Caution
• Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
• Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
• If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
the battery from freezing. If it freezes it will be damaged.
Checking the electrolyte level
The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-
mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.
– Open the engine bonnet and the battery cover ⇒ in “Safety
instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 221 ⇒ in “Warnings on handling the battery” on
page 234.
– Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the
battery.
– If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until
they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment diagram ⇒ page 277.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour,
depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery.
There are two different colours:
• Black: correct charge status.
• Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must be replaced. Contact a special-
ised workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 235 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Checking and refilling levels236
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long
periods, the battery should be checked by a specialised workshop between
the scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the
battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the
vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-
charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has
special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-
ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
• We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof
batteries which comply with standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This
standard applies as of 2001.
• Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe
the warnings ⇒ in “Warnings on handling the battery” on page 234.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary
household waste.
Leon_EN.book Seite 236 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Wheels and tyres 237
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
– If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and at a right angle.
– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
– Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
– When you remove the tyres, mark them in order to maintain the
same direction of rotation when they are installed again.
– When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
– Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres must be run in ⇒ page 193.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual
vibrations or the vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the
tyres is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when
fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
planing, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
• New tyres do not have maximum grip during the first 500 km. Drive
particularly carefully to avoid possible accidents.
• Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.
• If you notice unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side when
driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage.
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The
values refer to Summer tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
bar to the values given on the sticker.
Leon_EN.book Seite 237 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Wheels and tyres238
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure
should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a
journey.
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the
slightly raised pressures of warm tyres ⇒ .
WARNING
• Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre
pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there
is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.
• A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
• At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation
and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
• If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema-
turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre pressure monitoring
The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the
pressure of the tyres.
The system uses the speed sensors of the ABS wheels. It operates by
analysing the speed and frequency spectrum of each wheel.
For optimum performance, use genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and
adjust tyre pressures regularly.
Whenever the tyre pressures are changed or one or more tyres are changed,
the system should be Reset by pressing the SET switch on the centre console.
The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of
symbols and messages in the instrument panel display. The system uses ESP
⇒ page 187.
Note that tyre pressure also depends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure
increases about 0.1 bar for each 10 °C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre
heats up while the vehicle is being driven and the tyre pressure will rise
accordingly. For this reason, you should only adjust the tyre pressures when
they are cold (i.e. approximately at ambient temperature).
To ensure that the tyre pressure monitoring system works reliably, you should
check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures at regular intervals and
store the correct pressures (reference values) in the system.
A tyre pressure information label is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.
WARNING
• Never adjust tyre pressure when the tyres are hot. This may damage or
even burst the tyres. Risk of accident!
• An insufficiently inflated tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and
causes significant heating of the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre
bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
Leon_EN.book Seite 238 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Wheels and tyres 239
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
Significant tyre pressure loss
The tyre symbol ~ is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure of at least
one tyre is insufficient.
–Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the engine off.
– Check the tyre(s).
– Change the wheel if necessary.
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving
style and fitting.
Fig. 152 Tyre tread wear
indicators
Fig. 153 Diagram for
changing wheels
Leon_EN.book Seite 239 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Wheels and tyres240
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators
⇒ page 239, fig. 152, running across the tread. Depending on the make,
there will be 6 to 8 of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on the
tyre sidewall (for instance the letters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the
positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by
law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-
tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export
countries ⇒ .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.
For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month
⇒ page 237.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable
to change them around as shown ⇒ page 239, fig. 153. All the tyres will then
last for about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
• The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to
the tread wear indicators. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Worn
tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater
risk of aquaplaning.
• At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre
blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres-
sures.
• If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked
by an Authorised Service Centre.
• Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
• Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Run-flat tyres
Run-flat tyres allow you to continue driving even with a punc-
tured tyre, in the majority of cases.
In vehicles that are factory-fitted with run-flat tyres
25)
the loss of tyre
pressure is indicated on the instrument panel.
25)
Depending upon version and country.
Leon_EN.book Seite 240 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Wheels and tyres 241
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Driving with run-flat tyres (emergency running)
– Leave the ESP/TCS (Electronic Stability Programme) switched on,
or switch on ⇒ page 186.
– Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).
– Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.
– Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
– Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from
the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-
tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.
The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:
“DSST”, “Eufonia”, “RFT”, “ROF”, “RSC”, “SSR” or “ZP”.
The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are
supported on the sides (emergency driving).
The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can
then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for
example, low load), even more.
The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be
checked in a specialised workshop to detect possible damage and replace it
if necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one
tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance
which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency conditions
When loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this means
that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions ⇒ .
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
• smoke is coming from one of the tyres,
• there is a smell of rubber,
• the vehicle vibrates,
• there is a rattling noise.
When is it no longer possible to continue driving even using run-flat tyres?
• If one of the tyres has been severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre
has been badly damaged there is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown
off and cause damage to the fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
• It is also advisable to stop driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel
starts overheating and gives off smoke.
WARNING
When driving in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is
considerably impaired.
• The maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and
weather conditions. Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
• Avoid sharp turns and rapid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.
• Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
• If one or more tyres are being driven in emergency conditions, the
driving quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.
Note
• The run-flat tyres do not “deflate” on losing pressure because they are
supported on the reinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyre cannot be
detected with a visual inspection.
• Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency
conditions.
Leon_EN.book Seite 241 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Wheels and tyres242
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle’s design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe
handling ⇒ .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
RTyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
TSpeed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
• A direction of rotation symbol
• “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
“DOT ... 1103...” means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels be carried out by an Authorised
Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary
special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centre has full information on the technical require-
ments when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
WARNING
• We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been
approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
handling. Risk of accident.
• Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If you
have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all
times.
• Never use old tyres or those with an unknown history of use.
• If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the
brakes is not restricted. This could cause them to overheat.
• All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size
(rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.
Note
• For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from
other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle’s type approval for use on public roads.
• If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle (e.g. winter tyres) you should only use the spare tyre for a short period
of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as
possible.
Leon_EN.book Seite 242 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Wheels and tyres 243
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different
vehicle, even if it is the same model ⇒ page 212.
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench. ⇒ The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become
loose while driving. Risk of accident.
• The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil
to them.
•
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
• If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the
vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high,
the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Caution
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is
120 Nm.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicle’s
handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
specified for summer tyres (see sticker on tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle’s regis-
tration documents. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code ⇒ page 242, “New tyres and wheels” determines the
following speed limits for winter tyres: ⇒
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver’s field of view. These
stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
ments of each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
⇒ page 242, “New tyres and wheels”.
Leon_EN.book Seite 243 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Wheels and tyres244
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise,
this could lead to tyre damage and risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possible. They are quieter, do not wear
so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains are only permitted on front wheels and only for tyres 195/65R15
and 205/55R16. These tyres may only be fitted with fine-pitch link chains
which do not protrude more than 15 mm ⇒ page 276. For 235/35R19 tyres,
the use of snow chains is not permitted.
Other tyres may use fine-pitch links which do not protrude more than 9 mm,
including tension device.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manu-
facturer’s instructions. This will prevent the chains coming into contact
with the wheel housing.
Caution
Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will
impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.
Note
• In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The
legal requirements of the country should be followed.
• We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for informa-
tion about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Leon_EN.book Seite 244 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 245
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
If and when
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in
the luggage compartment.
– Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a
finger in the fitting.
– Take the on-board tools out of the vehicle.
The tool kit includes:
• Jack*
• Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
• Box spanner for wheel bolts*
• Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the
wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.
• Towing eye
• Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are
optional extras.
WARNING
• Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten
the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the
required torque. Risk of accident.
• The factory-supplied jack* is only designed for changing wheels on this
model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other
loads. Risk of injury.
• Use the jack* only on firm, level ground.
• Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident.
• If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be secured
by suitable stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 245 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when246
Compact temporary spare wheel* (emergency wheel)
The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles
without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when
strictly necessary.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the temporary spare wheel
Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the temporary spare wheel is only
intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The standard-size
road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the temporary spare wheel.
This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot
be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the
compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the compact tempo-
rary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit
the compact temporary spare in place of one of the rear wheels. You can then
attach the snow chains to the wheel taken from the rear and use this wheel to
replace the punctured front wheel.
WARNING
• The tyre pressures must be checked and corrected as soon as possible.
The emergency tyre pressure for dimensions 125/70R16 125/70R18
135/90R16 is 4.2 bar; for all other tyre dimensions please refer to the label
on the fuel cap. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
• Do not drive faster than 80 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.
• Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of acci-
dent.
• Never use two or more compact spare tyres at the same time, risk of
accident.
• No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on
the compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Note
• Vehicles with Brembo brakes must never use emergency wheels. These
vehicles are supplied with a tyre repair kit.
Fig. 154 Luggage
compartment. Access to
the spare wheel
Leon_EN.book Seite 246 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 247
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit (for vehicles not including a spare wheel) is
stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tyre Mobility System “Tyre repair kit”.
The tyre repair kit consists of a container with sealing compound to repair the
puncture and a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will
reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration
of a foreign body into the tyre.
Note
• Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Changing a wheel
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
– All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
– Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
–Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
– If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
– Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position.
This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution
If you have to change the wheel on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as described below
–Pull off the hub cap. See ⇒ page 248, fig. 155.
– Slacken the wheel bolts.
– Raise the car with the jack at the corresponding point.
Leon_EN.book Seite 247 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when248
– Remove the wheel and then mount the spare wheel
– Lower the vehicle.
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly with the box spanner.
–Replace the wheel trim.
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
– Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
– Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-
ment and secure it.
– Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as
possible.
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as
possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must be
120 Nm.
Note
• If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque
checked.
• For safety reasons, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt tight-
ening torque has been checked.
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must be removed to gain access to the wheel
bolts.
Removing
– Insert the extraction hook from the tools into the designated
ring, located in one of the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover
⇒ fig. 155.
– Pull off the hub cap.
Fig. 155 Changing the
wheel: Removing a hub
cap
Leon_EN.book Seite 248 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 249
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel
bolts
Removing
– Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.
– Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
– Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then
press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all
round.
Loosening the wheel bolts
The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.
Loosening
–Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
– Grasp the box spanner by the end turn it about one full turn to the
left ⇒ fig. 156.
Tightening
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
– Grasp the box spanner close to the end and turn the bolt to the
right until it is secured.
– An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Fig. 156 Changing the
wheel: loosen the wheel
bolts
Leon_EN.book Seite 249 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when250
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with
the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci-
dent.
Note
• Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
• If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
for support and take care not to slip.
Raising the vehicle
In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with
a jack.
– Locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel
to be changed ⇒ fig. 157.
– Place the jack under the jacking point and turn the crank until the
arm of the jack is directly below the vertical rib under the door
sill.
– Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits around the rib under
the door sill and the movable base plate of the jack is flat on the
ground ⇒ fig. 158.
– Raise the jack until the defective wheel is just clear of the ground.
Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points
⇒ fig. 157. There is only one jacking point for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good support. Use
Fig. 157 Jack position
points
Fig. 158 Fitting the jack
Leon_EN.book Seite 250 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 251
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
a large and stable base, if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as
tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
WARNING
• Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to
do so could result in an accident.
• The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct
jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off
suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be
completed.
After loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,
change the wheel as described below:
Removing a wheel
– Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the
screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface
⇒ fig. 159.
Fitting a wheel
– Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the
hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.
The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare
wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These
surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the
wheel bolts. The reversible screwdriver blade should be removed when the
tool is used for this purpose.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
rotation.
Note
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
Fig. 159 Changing the
wheel: Hexagonal socket
in screwdriver handle to
turn the wheel bolts
Leon_EN.book Seite 251 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when252
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
– Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go ⇒ fig. 160.
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
– Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Code
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of
the adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an
Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they
rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to mount the spare wheel so it rotates in the
wrong direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give
optimum performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet
roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
rotate in the correct direction.
Tyre repair kit (Tyre Mobility System)*
General information and safety notes
Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit called Tyre Mobility System.
In the event of a tyre puncture, a sealing compound and an air compressor are
located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-
tion of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.
It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.
Instructions for the sealing compound are located on the sealing compound
container.
Fig. 160 Anti-theft wheel
bolt
Leon_EN.book Seite 252 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 253
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
You will also find instructions for operating the compressor.
WARNING
• Do not attempt to repair a puncture with the sealing compound if the
tyre has been damaged by driving the vehicle after the tyre has lost its air.
• Always observe warnings and follow instructions concerning
compressor and sealing compound carefully.
• Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard
braking and fast cornering.
• Tyres which have been repaired with sealing compound are only suit-
able for temporary use over a short period. Therefore, please drive carefully
to the next available specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
If you have to dispose of a sealant can, go to a specialised waste service or to
a SEAT Technical Service, where the product can be recycled in an appropriate
waste container.
Note
• If sealant should leak out, leave it to dry. This way you can pull it off like a
piece of foil.
• Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the
sealing compound exchanged by a specialised workshop.
• Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Preparation work
Certain steps must be taken before repairing a tyre.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible.
–Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Engage first gear, or put the selector lever to position P.
–All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
– Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility System
“General information and safety notes.”
– Unscrew inflation cap from the affected wheel.
– Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position.
This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution
Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a slope.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Leon_EN.book Seite 253 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when254
Tyre repair
The following sections describe the procedures for repairing
a tyre.
Using the sealing compound
– The instructions on the container give detailed information on
how to use the sealing compound.
Inflating the tyre.
– Remove the air compressor and hose from the container.
– Screw the retaining nut onto the valve.
– Plug the compressor cable into a 12 volt power socket.
– Turn on compressor and monitor the pressure shown on the pres-
sure gauge.
Completing the repair
– Remove the compressor hose from the valve.
– Fit the valve cap.
– Unplug the compressor from the socket.
– Return all tools to their proper storing location.
Note
• If the vehicle is equipped with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre
pressures using the SET button on the centre console.
• The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6
minutes.
Fuses
Changing a fuse
Blown fuses must be replaced
Fig. 161 Left side of dash
panel: Fuse box cover
Fig. 162 Fuse box cover
in engine compartment
Leon_EN.book Seite 254 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 255
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Fuse cover underneath the steering wheel
– Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.
– Identify the fuse corresponding to the damaged electric
consumer ⇒ page 257.
– Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
– Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
Fuse cover in engine compartment
– Switch off the ignition and its failed electrical component.
– Remove the fuse cover in the engine compartment by pressing
the tabs towards the centre of the cover ⇒ page 254, fig. 162.
– Identify the fuse for the affected component ⇒ page 257.
– Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end
of the dash panel), fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
– Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
– Carefully fit the fuse cover back on to ensure no water can enter
the fuse box.
The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel and on the left-hand
side of the engine compartment.
The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-
ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen
windows) has been corrected.
Fuses colour code
WARNING
Never “repair” damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a
higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause
damage to other parts of the electrical system.
Note
• If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical
system must be checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
Colour Amps
light brown 5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
Natural (white) 25
Green 30
orange 40
Red 50
white 80
Blue 100
grey 150
violet 200
Leon_EN.book Seite 255 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when256
• If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to
another location in the electrical system.
• Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from
SEAT dealers.
• In addition to the fuses listed in the following tables, there are other fuses
which must be replaced by the Technical Service Workshop.
Leon_EN.book Seite 256 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 257
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Consumer Amps
1
Diagnosis Switchboard/ Instrument lighting/
Headlight control switchboard/ Flow meter/
Heated wipers/ Engine management/ AFS Head-
lamps
10
2
Engine control unit/ ABS-ESP switchboard/ Auto-
matic gearbox/ Instrument panel/ Trailer switch-
board/ Light switch / Brake sensor/ Power
steering/ Right and left headlights
10
3 Airbag 5
4
Heating/ Reverse switch/ ASR-ESP switch/ Elec-
trochrome mirror/ Park Pilot/ Oil level sensor
5
5 Right xenon headlight 10
6 Left xenon headlight 10
7 Vacant
8 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 5
9 Vacant
10 Vacant
11 Vacant
12 Central locking 15
13
Diagnosis/ Light switch/ Rain sensor/ Heated rear
window
10
14
Automatic gearbox / Heating/ Automatic gearbox
lever
10
15 Vacant
16 Vacant
17 Alarm 5
18 Kombi / levers with START STOP 5
19 Fog light aid 20
20 Navigation/radio with START STOP 15
21 Engine management 10
22 Fan switch 40
23 Electric windows (front) 30
24 Body Control Unit 20
25 Heated rear window 25
26 Rear electric windows 30
27 Engine (fuel control unit/pump relay) 15
28 Convenience controls 30
29 Vacant
30 Vacant
31 Vacuum pump 20
32 Vacant
33 Sunroof 25
34 Comfort switchboard/Central locking system 25
35 Vacant
36 Headlight washer system 20
37 Heated seats 30
38 Engine management 10
39 Telephone with START STOP 10
Number Consumer Amps
Leon_EN.book Seite 257 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when258
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
to alterations. If discrepancies should occur, please refer to the sticker on the
inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your model.
Fuses layout, engine compartment, left part
Fuses
40 Fan switch 40
41 Rear wiper motor / Switchboard wiring 20
42 12 V socket/ Cigarette lighter 20
43 Trailer bracket preinstallation 15
44 Trailer bracket preinstallation 20
45 Trailer bracket preinstallation 15
46 Vacant
47 Engine management 10
48 Engine management 10
49 Vacant
Number Consumer Amps
1 Windscreen wipers 30
2 DQ200 gearbox 30
3 Cable control unit 5
Number Consumer Amps
4 ABS 20
5 AQ gearbox 15
6 Instrument panel/Steering column 5
7 Ignition key 40
8 Radio 15
9 Telephone/TomTom Navigator 5
10
Engine management 5
Engine management 10
11 Vacant
12 Electronic control unit 5
13
Petrol injection module supply 15
Diesel injection module supply 30
14 Coil 20
15
Engine management 5
Pump relay 10
16 Right lighting 30
17 Horn 15
18 Vacant
19 Clean 30
20
Water pump 10
Pressure sensor pump for 1.8 engine 20
21
a)
Lambda probe
15
22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5
Number Consumer Amps
Leon_EN.book Seite 258 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 259
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb, first turn off the failed component.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a
reduction in the bulb life and condensation on the mirror surface, thus
reducing efficiency.
A bulb should only be replaced by one of the same type. The type is inscribed
on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base.
It is highly recommended to keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the
very least, the following spare bulbs, which are essential for road safety,
should be kept in the vehicle.
Main headlights
Dipped beam - H7
Main beam - H1
Position - W5W
Turn signal - PY21W
Xenon headlights
26)
/adaptive*
Dipped and full beam - D1S
27)
Daylight - P21W SLL
Position - W5W
Turn signals - PY21W
Fog lights
Fog lights - HB4
Fixed tail light
Stop/Position - P21W
28)
Turn signal - P21W
23
a)
Engine management 5
Engine management 10
Engine management 15
24 AKF, gearbox valve 10
25
a)
ABS pump
40
26 Left lighting 30
27
a)
Engine management 40
Engine management 50
28 Vacant
29
a)
Electric windows (front and back) 50
Electric windows (front) 30
30 Ignition key 50
a)
Ampere rating according to motorisation
Number Consumer Amps
26)
On this type of headlight, the bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given
that complex elements must be removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made
on the automatic control system incorporated.
27)
The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5
times more than that of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-
stances, there is no need to change the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
28)
Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it
will not work in either position or Stop.
Leon_EN.book Seite 259 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when260
Mobile tailgate light
Fog light (driver side) - P21W
Reverse (passenger side) - P21W
Position - W5W
Side turn signal
Side turn signal - W5W
Number plate light
Number plate light - C5W
Glove compartment lamp
Glove compartment lamp - W5W
Note
• Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has
no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the
lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be
demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.
• Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest
of your own safety, but also that of all other road users.
• Due to the difficulty in accessing some of the bulbs, any replacement work
should be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of
how to change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.
Main headlight bulbs
Turn signal
Dipped beam headlights
Main beam headlights
Side lights
Fig. 163 Main headlight
bulbs
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
Leon_EN.book Seite 260 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 261
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Turn signal bulbs
– Raise the bonnet.
– Rotate the bulb holder ⇒ fig. 164 to the left and pull.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Dipped beam headlights
– Raise the bonnet
Fig. 164 Turn signal
A
A
Fig. 165 Dipped beam
headlights
Fig. 166 Dipped beam
headlights
Leon_EN.book Seite 261 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when262
– Remove the loops ⇒ page 261, fig. 165 in the direction of
the arrow and remove the cover.
– Remove the connector ⇒ page 261, fig. 166 from the bulb.
– Unclip the retainer spring ⇒ page 261, fig. 166 pressing
inwards to the right.
– Remove the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Main beam headlights
– Raise the bonnet
– Remove the cover ⇒ fig. 167 by pulling on this.
– Remove the connector ⇒ fig. 168 from the bulb.
–Press the spring ⇒ fig. 168 inwards and to the right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that it sits correctly
into the cut-out on the reflector.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
A
1
A
2
A
3
Fig. 167 Main beam
headlights
Fig. 168 Main beam
headlights
A
C
A
1
A
2
Leon_EN.book Seite 262 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 263
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Side lights
– Raise the bonnet.
– Remove the cover ⇒ fig. 169 by pulling on this.
– Extract the bulb holder ⇒ fig. 170 outwards.
– Replace the bulb by pulling it out and inserting the replacement.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Tail lights
• On the body
- Turn signal, side and brake light
• On the tailgate
- Left side: side and fog lights.
- Right side: side and reverse.
Turn signal, side and brake lights on the body
Fig. 169 Side lights
Fig. 170 Side lights
A
D
A
1
Fig. 171 Turn signal, side
and brake lights on the
bodywork
Leon_EN.book Seite 263 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when264
– Press on the side pin outwards and take out the bulb holder.
– Remove the blown bulb and change it for a new one.
– To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when
fitting the bulb holder.
Side light, fog light and reverse light on the tailgate
–Open the tailgate.
– Use a screwdriver to remove the cover ⇒ fig. 172.
– Take the bulbholder out pressing on the securing pins and
extract it outwards ⇒ fig. 173.
– Replace the faulty bulb, rotating it to the left and outwards.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Fig. 172 Lights on the
tailgate
Fig. 173 Removing the
bulb holder
Leon_EN.book Seite 264 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 265
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Side turn signals
– Press the turn signal on one of its sides to take it out.
– Remove the bulb holder from the turn signal.
– Remove the faulty bulb and replace with a new one.
– Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal guide until it clicks into
place.
– First place the turn signal in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
the tabs ⇒ fig. 174, arrow .
– Insert the turn signal as shown by the arrow ⇒ fig. 174.
Luggage compartment lights
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the inside edge of this -arrow-
using the flat side of a screwdriver ⇒ fig. 175.
Fig. 174 Side turn signal
A
1
A
2
Fig. 175 Luggage
compartment light
Fig. 176 Luggage
compartment light
Leon_EN.book Seite 265 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when266
– Press the bulb sideways and remove it from its housing
⇒ page 265, fig. 176.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Registration light
– To remove the light cover, unscrew the bolts ⇒ fig. 177.
– Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ fig. 178.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Glove compartment lamp*
– Insert screwdriver above, between the light and the glove
compartment.
– Carefully remove the light Next lift the light out sideways.
–Replace the bulb.
– Insert the light on the connector side, first underneath then push
at the top until it clicks into place.
Fig. 177 Number plate
light
Fig. 178 Number plate
light
Leon_EN.book Seite 266 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 267
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Sun visor light
– Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,
as shown in the figure ⇒ fig. 180.
– Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ fig. 180.
– Installation is done in the reverse order.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be
connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer’s docu-
mentation). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm
2
for petrol engines
and at least 35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
• The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
• The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicle elec-
trical system.
Fig. 179 Removing sun
visor light
Fig. 180 Removing sun
visor light
Leon_EN.book Seite 267 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when268
How to jump start: description
Jump lead terminal connections
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles ⇒ .
2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal
⇒ fig. 181 or ⇒ fig. 182 of the vehicle with the flat
battery .
3. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive
terminal in the vehicle providing assistance .
4. On vehicles with no Start-Stop system, connect one end of the
black jump lead to the negative terminal in the vehicle
providing assistance ⇒ fig. 181.
5. On vehicles with the Start-Stop system, connect one end of the
black jump lead to a suitable ground terminal, to a solid metal
part bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself
⇒ fig. 182.
6. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to a solid metal
component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a
point near the battery .
7. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into
contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let
it run at idling speed.
9. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait one
or two minutes until the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
10. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
they are switched on).
Fig. 181 Diagram for
connecting jump leads if
the vehicle providing
assistance the current is
not fitted with the Start-
Stop system: flat battery
and battery providing
current .
A
A
A
B
Fig. 182 Diagram for
connecting jump leads if
the vehicle providing
assistance is fitted with
the Start-Stop system:
flat battery and
battery providing current
.
A
A
A
B
A
+
A
+
A
A
A
+
A
B
A
-
A
B
A
X
A
X
A
A
Leon_EN.book Seite 268 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 269
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
11. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehicle
with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are
generated when the leads are disconnected.
12. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse
order to the details given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
try again after about half a minute.
WARNING
• Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine
compartment ⇒ page 221, “Working in the engine compartment”.
• The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat
battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on
battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
• Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of
explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and
cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
• Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger
of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
• Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump
leads.
• Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the
negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could
be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
• Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the
fuel system or to the brake line.
• The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to
touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not
touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
• Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact
with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
• Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
WARNING (continued)
Leon_EN.book Seite 269 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when270
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-star ting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable ⇒ page 267.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
– Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
– Keep the clutch pressed down.
– Switch the ignition on.
– Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
– As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed
can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Comments
Please observe the following points if you use a tow-rope:
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
– Drive slowly at first until the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
gradually.
– Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
matic vehicle, accelerate gently.
– Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not
working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake sooner than normal
and pressing the pedal gently.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
– Ensure that the tow-rope remains taut at all times when towing.
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
A tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
enced drivers should not attempt to tow.
Leon_EN.book Seite 270 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when 271
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply
considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you
will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
• Put the selector lever into position “N”.
• Do not drive faster than 50 km/h.
• Do not tow further than 50 km.
• If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note
• Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
• Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
• For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
• If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
• If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels should
be raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified
person.
• The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be
carried out by a qualified person.
• The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the
notes on ⇒ page 270.
Leon_EN.book Seite 271 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
If and when272
Towing eyes
Fitting the towing eye
– Take the towing ring from the on-board tool set.
– Remove the front cover by pressing down on its left-hand side.
– Remove the rear cover by pressing down on the right hand side,
for FR and Cupra models. For all other versions, remove the rear
cover by pressing on the lower part.
– Screw the towing eye anti-clockwise, in the direction of the arrow,
to the limit position in the front ⇒ fig. 183 or rear ⇒ fig. 184
threaded hole.
Fig. 183 The front right
section of the vehicle:
Fitting the front towing
eye
Fig. 184 Fitting the
towing eye to the rear of
the vehicle
Leon_EN.book Seite 272 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Description of specifications 273
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Description of specifications
Important information
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation always has
precedence.
All technical specifications provided in this manual are valid for the standard
model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Maintenance
Programme or the vehicle registration documents shows which engine is
installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,
for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifications section
Abbrevia-
tion
Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine
power.
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
CN Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.
RON
Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance
of petrol.
Leon_EN.book Seite 273 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Description of specifications274
Vehicle identification data
The most important information is given on the identification
plate and the vehicle data sticker.
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.
Identification plate
The identification plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compart-
ment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel recess in the
luggage compartment.
The following information is provided on the vehicle data sticker: ⇒ fig. 185.
These data are also provided in the Maintenance Programme.
Production control number
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
Model code number
Model designation / engine power output
Engine and gearbox code letters
Paintwork number / interior trim code
Optional equipment codes
Consumption values
CO
2
emissions values
Data from 2 to 9 are also provided in the Maintenance Programme.
Consumption figures and CO
2
Consumption (litres/100 km) / CO
2
emissions (g/km) urban
Consumption (litres/100 km) / CO
2
emissions (g/km) motorway
Consumption (litres/100 km) / CO
2
emissions (g/km) mixed
Fig. 185 Vehicle data
sticker (luggage compart-
ment)
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
A
A
B
A
C
Leon_EN.book Seite 274 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Description of specifications 275
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Information on fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle
data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions of the vehicle can be found on the
vehicle data sticker.
The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle
weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox
combination and the equipment fitted.
The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the
tests indicated in regulations 715/2007/EC and 692/2008/EC.
Note
• Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on
personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the
vehicle condition.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase ⇒ .
WARNING
• Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle’s handling and lead to an acci-
dent. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions
and requirements.
• Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight
rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weight
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive
trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain
circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-
tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these
data ⇒ .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket
must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow
approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the
road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
Leon_EN.book Seite 275 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Description of specifications276
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a
wheelbase of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a
legal stipulation for a drawbar load.
WARNING
• For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in
countries where higher speeds are permitted.
• Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the
permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. Do not
reduce the slightly raised pressures of warm tyres ⇒ .
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.
Consult the chapter “wheels” of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ⇒ . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
• Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre
pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there
is an increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
• If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen while the
vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high,
the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Leon_EN.book Seite 276 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications 277
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,
otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components
mentioned above. These operations are described in the ⇒ page 221.
Overview
You will find further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the tech-
nical specifications as of ⇒ page 273.
Fig. 186 Diagram for the
location of the various
elements
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
Leon_EN.book Seite 277 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications278
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 PS)
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 63 (85)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3800
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1390
Fuel
Super 95 RON or Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Maximum speed in km/h 172
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 14.1
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1745
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1250
Gross front axle weight in kg 900
Gross rear axle weight in kg 895
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 620
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 800
Leon_EN.book Seite 278 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications 279
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 PS)
Engine specifications
Performance
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 2.8 litres
Running on LPG Running on petrol
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 72 (98)/ 5600 75 (102)/ 5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 144/ 3800 148/ 3800
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1595
4/ 1595
Fuel LPG
Super 95 RON or Normal 91
RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Running on LPG Running on petrol
Maximum speed in km/h 181 184
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8.4 8.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12.6 12.2
Leon_EN.book Seite 279 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications280
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.2 77 kW (105 PS)
Engine specifications
Running on LPG Running on petrol
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1836 1775
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1341 1280
Gross front axle weight in kg 935 936
Gross rear axle weight in kg 950 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Trailer without brakes 670
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.1 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105)/5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 175/1550-4100
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1197
Fuel
Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research-Octane-Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
With a slight power loss
Leon_EN.book Seite 280 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications 281
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
without Start&Stop with Start&Stop
Maximum speed in km/h 187 187
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.2 7.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10.9 10.9
without Start&Stop with Start&Stop
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1770 1775
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1275 1280
Gross front axle weight in kg 940 940
Gross rear axle weight in kg 890 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
without Start&Stop with Start&Stop
Trailer without brakes 630 640
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres
Leon_EN.book Seite 281 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications282
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS)
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 92 (125)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1500-4000
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1390
Fuel
Super 95 RON or Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 197
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9.8
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1819
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1324
Gross front axle weight in kg 969
Gross rear axle weight in kg 899
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 660
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300
Leon_EN.book Seite 282 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications 283
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS)
Engine specifications
Performance
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 118 (160)/ 4500-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500-4500
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1798
Fuel
Super 95 RON or Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h 213 213
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5.6 5.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7.9 7.8
Leon_EN.book Seite 283 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications284
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS)
Engine specifications
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1850 1865
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1355 1370
Gross front axle weight in kg 1035 1035
Gross rear axle weight in kg 898 898
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 670 680
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 155 (211)/ 5300-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1700 - 5200
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Fuel
Super 95 RON or Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Leon_EN.book Seite 284 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications 285
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h 233 233
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5 5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 6.9 6.9
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1890 1920
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1395 1425
Gross front axle weight in kg 1045 1075
Gross rear axle weight in kg 900 900
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 690 710
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Leon_EN.book Seite 285 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications286
Petrol engine 2.0 177 kW (240 PS) Cupra
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 177 (240)/ 5700-6300
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 300/ 2200-5500
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Fuel
Premium 98 RON or Premium 95 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 247
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 4.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 6.4
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1945
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1450
Gross front axle weight in kg 1047
Gross rear axle weight in kg 926
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 720
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Leon_EN.book Seite 286 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications 287
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Engine oil filling capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 195 kW (265 PS) Cupra R
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 195 (265)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 2500-5000
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Fuel
Premium 98 RON or Premium 95 RON
a)
a)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 250 (limited)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 4.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 6.2
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1945
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1450
Gross front axle weight in kg 1050
Gross rear axle weight in kg 925
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Leon_EN.book Seite 287 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications288
Trailer weight
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) with/without DPF
Engine specifications
Performance
Trailer without brakes 720
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105) 4400
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1500-2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/1598
Fuel Min. 51 CN
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h 185 185
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.7 7.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11.7 11.7
Leon_EN.book Seite 288 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications 289
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF Start&Stop
Engine specifications
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1860 1880
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1365 1385
Gross front axle weight in kg 1010 1030
Gross rear axle weight in kg 890 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 680 690
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105) 4400
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1500-2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/1598
Fuel Min. 51 CN
Leon_EN.book Seite 289 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications290
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil filling capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 185
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11.3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1820
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1325
Gross front axle weight in kg 1010
Gross rear axle weight in kg 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 660
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres
Leon_EN.book Seite 290 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications 291
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF Ecomotive
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105) 4400
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1500-2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/1598
Fuel Min. 51 CN
Maximum speed in km/h 190
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11.5
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1820
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1325
Gross front axle weight in kg 1010
Gross rear axle weight in kg 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 660
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Leon_EN.book Seite 291 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications292
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS) DPF
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 103 (140)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CN
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h 205 205
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6.3 6.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9.3 9.3
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1875 1895
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1380 1400
Gross front axle weight in kg 1045 1060
Gross rear axle weight in kg 890 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Leon_EN.book Seite 292 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications 293
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Trailer weight
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI PD 103 kW (140 PS) without DPF
Engine specifications
Performance
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 690 700
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CN
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h 205 205
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6.3 6.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9.3 9.3
Leon_EN.book Seite 293 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications294
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil filling capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS) DPF
Engine specifications
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1885 1925
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1390 1430
Gross front axle weight in kg 1042 1077
Gross rear axle weight in kg 885 890
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 690 710
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 1750-2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CN
Leon_EN.book Seite 294 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications 295
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil filling capacity
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h 214 214
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5.9 5.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8.2 8
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1890 1915
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1395 1420
Gross front axle weight in kg 1045 1075
Gross rear axle weight in kg 890 895
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 690 710
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres
Leon_EN.book Seite 295 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Technical Specifications296
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Capacities
Tyre pressure
Length, width 4315 mm/ 1768 mm
Height at kerb weight 1459 mm
Front and rear projection 949 mm/ 788mm
Wheelbase 2578 mm
Turning circle 10.7 m
Track width
a)
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front Rear
1525 mm 1509 mm
1539 mm 1523 mm
Fuel tank 55 l. Reserve 7 l.
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
Leon_EN.book Seite 296 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Index 297
Index
A
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
AFS (cornering lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Air conditioner
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Air conditioner automatic mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Air conditioner*
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Air recirculation mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
All-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Anti-theft alarm
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Aspects to take into account before starting the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 132
Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 132
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Automatic gearbox
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 171
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Automatic windscreen wiper/washer . . . . . . . . 127
Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 144
B
Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Battery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Biodiesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Brake pedal
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 193
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Bulb changes
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Bulb defect
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 162
Leon_EN.book Seite 297 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Index298
C
Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Automatic locking system for involuntary
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Central locking button
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Centre console with drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Changing gear
See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Changing gear in tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Changing the bulbs
Main headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the main headlight bulbs
dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Turn signal bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Changing the tail light bulbs
Side light, fog light and tail light on the tailgate
264
Changing the tail lights
Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Turn signal, side and brake lights on the body
263
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 235
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child seats
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Cleaning alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Climatronic
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Cloth seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Clothes hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Coming/leaving home function . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Compartment for on-board documentation . . 141
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Controls
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Convenience closing
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Convenience opening
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 229
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Coolant loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Coolant temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints . .
13
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Leon_EN.book Seite 298 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Index 299
Correct sitting position
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Cruise control*
Turning off the cruise control system . . . . . 183
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D
Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Daytime lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Deactivating front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Deactivating the airbag
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Differential lock fault (EDL)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Display (without warning or information texts) . 61
Disposal
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 186
Driver
See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Driveshaft differential
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Economically / Environmentally friendly . . 195
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic
gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Dynamic cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 121
E
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Electrical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 163
Electronic Stability Programme . . . . . . . . . 88, 187
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . 123, 185
Emergency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Emergency opening
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Emission control system
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Engine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 221
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Engine fault
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Engine management
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Leon_EN.book Seite 299 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Index300
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Engine oil pressure
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 87
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 195
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 187
See also Electronic Stability Programme . . 161
Example of menu use
Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 69
To activate and deactivate the speed limit
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Example of the use of the menus
Open the Configuration menu with the MFI lever
68
Open the Configuration menu with the steering
wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Examples of menu use
Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
F
Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Flexible service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fold down the backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Front drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Front interior light
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44
Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Front seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fuel level
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fuel Tank
Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fuel tank
See Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
G
G 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
General overview of the engine compartment 277
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
GRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 176
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Head restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 137
Adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . 137
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Headlight flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Leon_EN.book Seite 300 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Index 301
Headlights
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlight washer system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Heated rear window
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Hill-start aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
How to jump start description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Hydraulic Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
I
Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Information in the multifunction display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Information messages in the display . . . . . . . . . 66
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel menus
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
J
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
L
Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Load compartment in the luggage compartment
See Loading the luggage compartment . . . . 16
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 16
Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 166, 216
LPG system
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Filler neck adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
See also Loading the luggage compartment 16
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 124
Main beam headlights
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Main headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Maintenance
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Manual mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MEDIA-IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
MFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . 213
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
N
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
O
Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Leon_EN.book Seite 301 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Index302
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
One-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 73
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 80
P
Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Passenger
See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . 11, 12
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 203
R
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Radio navigation steering wheel controls
Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Rear fog light
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rear window automatic wiper/washer . . . . . . 130
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Remote control key
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Repairs
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Reverse gear
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Roll-back function
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Roof rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Run-flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Running in
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
S
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Safety notes
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Leon_EN.book Seite 302 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Index 303
Deactivating front passenger airbag . . . . . . 45
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 138
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat belt tensioner
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Sitting position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 276
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate
filter
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Starting petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164
After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 164
Start-Stop
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Steering wheel audio controls
Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 160
Storage area
Other storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Storage compartment
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Storage compartments
Front left hand side seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Sun visor
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Switch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Switches
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
T
Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tank
Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
TCS (Traction control system)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22
Leon_EN.book Seite 303 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Index304
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Tow starting
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Towing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Traction control system
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Trailer
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Trailer turn signals
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Tyre Mobility System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . . 252
Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 247
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Tyre pressure warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 252
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 237
U
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Unlocking and locking
Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
V
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Vehicle paintwork
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 203
Vehicle tools
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Volumetric sensor*
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
W
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Warning messages in the display . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Warning reports
Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 80
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 81
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 205
Water
Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 230
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Wearing suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 276
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 276
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30
Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
13
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21, 30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Windscreen interval wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Leon_EN.book Seite 304 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
Index 305
Windscreen washer fluid
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Changing the front blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Changing the rear wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . 232
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 221
Leon_EN.book Seite 305 Mittwoch, 1. September 2010 6:16 18
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that
at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all
may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omis-
sion, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
;
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.10
Vehicle data
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1. Vehicle identification number
2
. Identification numbers
Type/Model/Engine
Gearbox/Finishes
3
. Identification letters
Engine/Gearbox/Paintwork
Equipment
4
. Identification codes of variable equipment
5
. Consumption (l/100 km) / CO
2
Emissions (g/km) urban
Consumption (l/100 km) / CO
2
Emissions (g/km) motorway
Consumption (l/100 km) / CO
2
Emissions (g/km) mixed
Note
• We recommend that you visit an Authorised SEAT Service Centre when-
ever you require any work done on your vehicle.
• SEAT regularly communicates to its Authorised Service Centres new
product developments. They have tools and highly specialized person-
nel who can guarantee the safety and performance of your vehicle.
• Scrupulously following the General Programme for Inspection
Services in Authorised SEAT Service Centres will ensure you maintain
greater value for your vehicle.
Portada PM_interior.qxd:Interior Manual TOLEDO 26/7/10 15:57 Página 3
LEON OWNER’S MANUAL
Inglés 1P0012003DG (07.10) (GT9)
LEON Inglés (07.10)
1P0012003DG
Portada LEON.qxd:Maquetación 1 23/7/10 08:50 Página 3
